530435
7
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/304
Pagina verder
1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 M2007
© Saab Automobile AB 2006
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Safety 11
Security 47
9-3 Convertible 61
Instruments and controls 81
Interior equipment 117
Starting and driving 149
Car care 201
Customer Assistance and Information 273
Technical data 279
Index 299
93_U S_M 07.book Page 1 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
2
Introduction
This manual provides practical guidance on
driving and caring for your Saab.
Although this manual describes the most
important differences between model vari-
ants, it does not specify the equipment or
features included on individual models.
Importation and distribution of Saab auto-
mobiles, spare parts and accessories are
handled exclusively by Saab Cars USA, Inc.
in the United States and by General Motors
of Canada Limited in Canada.
We recommend that you read through the
manual before taking the car out for the first
time and keep it in the car for future refer-
ence.
To find a specific item, use the overviews
given on page 3–6. A list of content is given
at the beginning of each section of the
manual, and there is also a comprehensive
index at the back of the book.
Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Ser-
vice Record booklet which contains impor-
tant warranty information and specifies the
regular maintenance to be carried out. Also
included is a Quick Reference Guide, an
Infotainment System manual, tire warran-
ties and (U.S. customers), a dealer directory
with Roadside Assistance Program infor-
mation.
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-
rate modifications and to alter specifications
during production without prior notice.
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all
cars (can depend on model variant, engine
variant, market specification, options or
accessories).
If you have any questions concerning your
car, its equipment, the warranty conditions,
etc., your Saab dealer will be pleased to
help, or you may call the Saab Customer
Assistance Center in the U.S. at 1-800-955-
9007 or email them at saab-
crm@saabusa.com. In Canada, please
contact the Saab Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-263-1999.
Enjoy the road ahead!
Saab Automobile AB
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
exchange parts or accessories that are not
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
WARNING
Failure to heed warnings may cause
personal injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE texts warns of potential damage
to the car if the recommendations are not
followed.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 2 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
3
Instrument panel
Changing bulbs __________ 219
Front fog lights___________ 99
Headlight levelling________ 97
High/low beam __________ 98
Parking lights____________ 97
Rear fog light____________ 99
Cruise Control___________ 169
Direction indicators _______ 100
High/low beam control stalk 98
Fuel gauge __________________ 89
Odometer and trip meter________ 90
Speedometer ________________ 87
Tachometer __________________ 87
Temperature gauge____________ 88
Turbo gauge _________________ 88
Warning and indicator lights _____ 82
Saab Information Display (SID)___ 89
Ashtray _____________________ 134
Cigarette lighter _______________ 134
Replacing wiper blades ___ 217
Washers and wipers______ 101
Washer fluid ____________ 218
Automatic climate control __ 106
Car care and maintenance_ 268
Hazard warning lights_____ 100
Seat heating, ACC _______ 113
93_U S_M 07.book Page 3 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
4
Exterior
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 265
Body __________________ 264
Service program _________ 274
Moonroof_______________ 128
Touching up paintwork ____ 264
Washing _______________ 261
Waxing and polishing _____ 264
Brake lights _____________ 227
Changing bulbs __________ 219
Light switches ___________ 97
Taillights _______________ 227
Towing_________________ 195
Towing hook eyes ________ 195
Towing a trailer __________ 188
Folding down the rear seat _ 136
Lighting ________________ 227
Load-through hatch_______ 138
Spare wheel ____________ 140
Tools __________________ 140
Trunk __________________ 136
Maximum loads _______________ 280
Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 192
Roof load ____________________ 192
Hood _______________________ 202
Washing the engine bay_________ 261
Central locking __________ 48
Child safety locks ________ 52
Lock buttons____________ 48
Trunk lock______________ 51
Changing bulbs _________ 219
Dipswitch ______________ 97
Direction indicators_______ 100
Front lights _____________ 221
Headlight levelling (xenon) _ 97
Headlight switches _______ 97
Headlight washers _______ 218
Economical motoring _____ 183
Fuel filler door __________ 157
Fuel gauge _____________ 89
Fuel grade _____________ 285
Refueling ______________ 157
Braking _____________________ 170
Changing wheels______________ 257
Spare wheel _________________ 254
Tire pressure ________________ 292
Tires _______________________ 241
Wheels _____________________ 290
Winter driving ________________ 185
93_U S_M 07.book Page 4 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
5
Interior
Airbag _________________ 32
Steering wheel adjustment _ 118
Steering _______________ 288
Interior rearview mirror _________ 123
Vanity mirror _________________ 132
Door mirrors__________________ 122
Airbag_________________ 32
Child safety locks ________ 52
Child seats _____________ 24
Safety belt care _________ 260
Safety belts ____________ 12
Glove box ______________ 134
Storage compartments____ 134
Automatic transmission ___ 163
Changing gears _________ 162
Manual transmission _____ 162
Child seats ________________ 24
Folding down the rear seat ____ 136
Rear seat__________________ 136
Safety belts ________________ 12
Seat adjustment ____________ 18
Seat heating _______________ 113
Upholstery care_____________ 260
Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 232
Interior light switches ___________ 131
Moonroof ____________________ 128
Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 134
Break-In Period _______________ 161
Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 185
Ignition switch ________________ 150
Parking brake_________________ 177
Parking _____________________ 177
Starting the engine ____________ 152
Fuses _________________ 234
Electric windows _________ 119
93_U S_M 07.book Page 5 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
6
Engine bay, 4-cyl
Color code______________ 293
Engine number __________ 293
Gearbox number _________ 293
Warning labels __________ 8
Vehicle identification number 293
Alternator_______________ 216
Drive belt _______________ 216
Exhaust emission control __ 155
Ignition system __________ 286
Simple troubleshooting (ACC) 268
Spark plugs _____________ 286
Turbo gauge ____________ 88
Engine oil: checking level __ 207
Automatic transmission _________ 163
Transmission: technical data _____ 287
Manual transmission ___________ 162
Battery ______________________ 213
Battery charge ________________ 213
Jump starting _________________ 198
Engine: description ____________ 202
Engine: technical data __________ 283
Important considerations for driving 154
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 284
Topping-up fluid _________ 218
Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 101
Washer fluid ____________ 218
Washer jets ____________ 218
Power steering________________ 212
Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 212
Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 209
Driving in hot climates __________ 187
Radiator_____________________ 283
Temperature gauge ____________ 88
Changing a fuse_________ 234
Fuse table _____________ 239
Fuses _________________ 234
Relays ________________ 239
ABS brakes_____________ 170
Brake pads _____________ 211
Brake system ___________ 289
Brake fluid______________ 211
93_U S_M 07.book Page 6 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
7
Engine bay, 2.8 V6
Power steering___________ 212
Fluid: checking/topping up__ 212
Vehicle identification
number________________ 293
Colour code_____________ 293
Engine number __________ 293
Warning labels___________ 8
Gearbox number _________ 293
Exhaust emission control __ 155
Drive belt _______________ 216
Simple troubleshooting (ACC) 268
Alternator_______________ 216
Turbo gauge ____________ 88
Spark plugs _____________ 286
Ignition system __________ 286
Automatic transmission _________ 163
Manual gearbox_______________ 162
Gearbox: technical data_________ 287
Engine: description ____________ 202
Engine oil: topping up __________ 207
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 284
Engine: technical data __________ 283
Important considerations
for driving ___________________ 154
Engine oil: checking level________ 207 Battery ______________________ 213
Battery charge ________________ 213
Jump starting _________________ 198
Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 101
Topping-up fluid _________ 218
Washer jets_____________ 218
Washer fluid ____________ 218
Changing a fuse _________ 236
Fuses _________________ 234
Relays ________________ 239
Fuse table______________ 236
ABS brakes_____________ 171
Brake pads _____________ 289
Brake system ___________ 170
Brake fluid______________ 211
Cooling system, coolant capacity__ 283
Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 209
Driving in hot climates __________ 187
Temperature gauge ____________ 88
93_U S_M 07.book Page 7 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
8
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
Radiator fan:
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
Battery:
No sparks, flames or smoking
Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING
SHIELD EYES
KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN
•ACID
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
EXPLOSIVE GAS
Warning labels
A/C system:
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury.
System to be
serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer man-
ual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 680 g R134a.
Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
Maintenance Free
P/N 127 93 955
12V 60Ah 580A (EN)
000 A-12102-EP
LEVEL INDICATOR
DARK OK
CLEAR LOW
CANADA
NETTOYER LE BOUCHON
DE REMPLISSAGE
AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
UTILISER SEULEMENT
DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROV-
ENANT D’UN CONTE-
NANT SCELLÉ.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 8 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
9
Changing wheels:
Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load
2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do
not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,
use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in
the vehicle.
Contact a Saab dealer if a
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
This label is only found on
cars with xenon headlights.
EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS
Children can be killed or serious injured by the air bag.
The back seat is the safest place for children.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.
Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Jack
Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
tire snow chains.
Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
and level ground.
Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
JACKING INSTRUCTION
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
changed.
3 Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
one-half turn.
5 Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
6 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
wheel is not loose.
7 Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
sequence.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 9 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
10
No sparks,
flames or
smoking
Buckle up
Refer to
the Owner’s
Manual
Airbag
Shield eyes
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat
Keep out of
reach of
children
Electric
windows
Battery acid
contains sul-
phuric acid
Deactivating
of rear window
switches
Risk of
explosive gas
Central
locking, lock
Central
locking,
unlock
Trunk lid,
opening
Headlights
Windshield
wipers
Direction
indicators
Windshield
washers
Parking lights Defroster
Hazard warn-
ing lights
Rear window
heating
Front fog
lights
Cabin fan
Rear fog light
Coolant tem-
perature
Radiator fan
No charge to
battery
Fuel
Foot brake
Coolant level
Engine oil
pressure
ABS brakes
Electronic
Stability
Program
Example of symbols that can be found in your car
93_U S_M 07.book Page 10 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
11Safety
Safety belts ___________ 12
Seats ________________ 18
Head restraints ________ 23
Child safety ___________ 24
Airbag________________ 32
Safety
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 11 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
12 Safety
Safety belts
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
provided for all seats.
The results of studies show that it is equally
important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
Safety belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the safety
belt reminder will come on if the driver or/
and the front seat passenger has not buck-
led up.
The reminder for the driver is in the main
instrument and for the front seat passenger
on the instrument panel.
The reminder for the driver has an additional
audible signal which sounds for 6 seconds,
or until the driver fastens his belt.
The following applies to the both front
seats: If the belt is not fastened before the
car starts to move there will be an additional
reminder when the speed exceeds 15 mph.
The text Use your seatbelt. is lit on the
Saab Information Display (SID) and the
symbol will flash.
If the belt is not fastened then an audible
signal will come on after 30 seconds.
The text in the SID can be turned off by the
CLR-button on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay
full attention to the traffic.
Safety belts must be worn at all times
by all occupants.
Child safety, see page 24.
Check that the locking tongue is prop-
erly locked in the belt lock.
In the event of a crash, a rear-seat
passenger not wearing a safety belt
will be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.
Driver seat safety belt reminder
93_U S_M 07.book Page 12 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
13Safety
Correct position for safety belt
Consider this:
Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs.
The shoulder strap must be as far in on
the shoulder as possible.
Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
Only one person per safety belt!
For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
applied hard or a crash occurs.
Children up to 6 years of age must always
be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-
mends the use of a child seat for children
up to the age of 10.
Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standard three-point belts. Make sure that
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important.
An out of position safety belt can result
in the wearer sliding underneath the
belt in a crash (submarining) and
injury can result from the lap portion
cutting into the abdomen.
Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull
the belt off the shoulder and under the
arm.
Two people must never share one
safety belt. In the event of a crash
those sharing a belt risk being crushed
together and injured.
Correct seating position
93_U S_M 07.book Page 13 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
14 Safety
Front safety belts
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
The front safety belts have their lower
anchorage points on the seats. The safety
belts follow the seats when the legroom is
adjusted.
Refer to page 260 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
Belt height adjustment,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
safety belts can be set at different heights.
The front belt guide in the Convertible is not
adjustable due to the belt being incorpo-
rated into the seat.
To fasten the belt Press the red button to release the belt The belt guide on door pillar, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
93_U S_M 07.book Page 14 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
15Safety
Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as
possible without rubbing against the neck.
To avoid chafing in the case of a short
person, the guide can be lowered until the
belt comes about an inch (a few centime-
ters) from the throat but still provides safe
restraint.
Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to
the desired position. To lower it, depress the
catch release button while lowering the
guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
position.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 15 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
16 Safety
Safety belt pretensioners
Sport Sedan and SportCombi: The front
safety belts are equipped with pretension-
ers and force limiters. The pretensioners
are activated in the event of a violent frontal
or side-on crash. The safety belt pretension-
ers are only activated if the safety belt in
question is in use but not activated should
the car roll over.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the forward movement of the body
by tensioning the belt. The force limiters
reduce belt loads on the body by "slacken-
ing" the safety belt slightly to absorb the
body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possi-
ble.
Convertible: The front and rear safety belts
are equipped with pretensioners and force
limiters. The pretensioners are activated in
the event of a violent frontal or side-on
crash. The front safety belt pretensioners
are only activated if the safety belt in ques-
tion is in use.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the movement of the body by ten-
sioning the belt, including in a roll over
crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads
on the body by "slackening" the safety belt
slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy
as gradually as possible.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected and
replaced as necessary. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer for any
necessary repairs.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 16 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
17Safety
Safety belts, rear seat, Sport
Sedan and SportCombi
Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see
page 75
The three rear seats all have three-point
safety belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
you and inserting the tongue into the buckle.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt.
See page 260 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 136).
If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
Rear safety belts, Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Securing an item on the rear seat
93_U S_M 07.book Page 17 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
18 Safety
Seats
Manually adjusted front seats 3
The following front seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
Height 3
•Legroom
Backrest rake angle
Lumbar support firmness 3
Head restraint height
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
1Height
2 Legroom
3 Backrest rake angle
4 Head restraint height
Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
wheel (see page 118).
Electrically adjustable front seats 3
See page 20.
Electric heating, front seats 3
See pages 113.
Height adjustment 3
Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
spring-loaded to return to its neutral posi-
tion. Repeated lifting of the lever will
increase the height in steps.
Press down the lever to lower the seat.
Repeated downward presses of the lever
will lower the seat in steps.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 18 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
19Safety
Legroom adjustment
Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
slide the seat to the desired position.
Backrest rake angle
To find the most comfortable position, turn
the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
the backrest.
Lumbar support 3
Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
turning the knob.
WARNING
Check that the seat is locked in the new
position. If not, it may move while the car
is being driven and it could result in injury
to the occupant in the event of a crash.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
Adjusting the backrestAdjusting the legroom Adjusting the lumbar support
93_U S_M 07.book Page 19 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
20 Safety
Electrically adjustable front
seats 3
With the doors closed the seats can only be
adjusted when the ignition is ON.
However, there are two exceptions:
To facilitate getting into the car, both
seats can be adjusted when either of the
front doors is open.
The seats can be adjusted up to
2 minutes after both doors have been
closed (applicable only to cars without
window and sunroof pinch protection).
Height adjustment and seat
angle
Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
section of the front lever.
Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
section of the front lever.
Legroom adjustment
Adjust the legroom with the front lever.
WARNING
The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjust-
ing the seat, and make sure that noth-
ing gets caught and damaged. Ensure
that nothing can be trapped behind the
seat when adjusting it.
Bear in mind that children can be
injured if they play with the electrically-
operated seats.
Always remove the remote control
when you leave the car to prevent
personal injury caused by the electri-
cally adjustable seats, for example,
due to children playing. Electrically
adjustable front seats with memory
function, see page 21.
Adjusting the height and angle Adjusting the legroom
93_U S_M 07.book Page 20 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
21Safety
Backrest rake angle
Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with
the rear lever.
Lumbar support 3
Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
turning the knob.
Memory function 3
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
WARNING
The legroom of the electrically operated
driver’s seat can always be adjusted,
whether or not a front door is open and
irrespective of the position of the ignition
switch.
Adjusting the rake angle Adjusting the lumbar support
Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi
Memory function buttons
93_U S_M 07.book Page 21 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
22 Safety
When the ignition is ON, all seat settings
can be adjusted. When the door is open and
before the remote control has been inserted
into the ignition switch, all seat settings can
be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
The memory also includes the door mirror
settings.
Storing and restoring settings
1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The lumbar support is not included by
the memory function.
2 Press and hold the M-button and then
press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
the settings have been saved.
To recall programmed settings, press and
hold the desired memory button until the
seat and door mirrors adopt their pro-
grammed positions. The memory function
also includes the door mirror settings.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
door mirror can be angled down, refer to
page 122.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 22 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
23Safety
Head restraints
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Head restraint, Convertible, see page 74.
The front seats are equipped with Saab
Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus
limiting the backward movement of the
head.
Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
need to be replaced or repaired after a rear-
end crash.
The front and rear head restraints can be
raised and lowered to a number of positions.
The front seat head restraints must be
set at a height where at least one notch
is visible on the rear of the head restraint
stem (pole).
In this position the vertical distance between
the top of the seat back and the head
restraint should be greater than 30 mm
when measured at the rear.
Under no circumstances should the front
seat head restraint be forced down below
this position.
Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
Lowering: Press the head restraint
forward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
WARNING
Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 23 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
24 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
Children must always be suitably
restrained in the car.
DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
Children 12 and under or
shorter than 150 cm
(59 inches) can be killed by
the airbag
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
for children
NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in a
car, even for a short time.
Children can suffer heat stroke,
perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.
Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
At gas stations, take the remote
control out of the car while filling the
tank.
Never allow children to climb on top of
or under motor vehicles.
Always look for children before back-
ing your car out of a garage or drive-
way.
To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in an enclosed
garage.
Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.
WARNING
Protect children from getting
trapped in the trunk of your car
Teach children not to play in or around
cars.
Watch children when loading or
unloading the car so they don´t get
locked in by mistake.
Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
dren´s sight and reach.
Keep the rear fold-down seat closed to
help prevent children from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 24 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
25Safety
General information on child
safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained. However, the type of restraint
must be appropriate for the size of the child.
We recommend that you always consult
your Saab dealer before fitting a child seat,
child restraint or booster cushion.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child restraint instructions.
Saab recommends the use of a rear-
facing child seat for as long as this is
possible - for all children under 18 kg
(40 lbs.) as a minimum. Use a child seat
approved for the weight of the child.
Saab recommends the use of a booster seat
for children up to the length of 150 cm
(4 ft 11 in.) or the weight of 36 kg (80 lbs.).
LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety stan-
dard for a uniform method of fitting child
restraints without using the standard safety
belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize the LATCH system.
The LATCH system is installed in the car to
facilitate proper fitting of child restraints
designed for and equipped with LATCH
attachments.
The LATCH system consists of top tether
and lower anchorages . In this vehicle,
LATCH is installed at the two outboard seat-
ing positions in the rear seat, and there is a
top tether on the rear center position (not
Convertible).
The top tethers are located on top of the
parcel shelf (Sport Sedan), see page 28, on
the back of the rear seat (SportCombi), see
page 29 and behind the head restraints
(Convertible) see page 30.
The lower anchorages are located where
the seat cushion and seat back come
together. There is a label above the anchor-
ages, see picture on next page. Label
consists of a symbol of a child restrained in
a seat inside a circle.
When fitting child restraints in cars you must
always read the instructions supplied by the
child restraint manufacturer.
If you have any questions regarding LATCH
please contact your Saab dealer.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 25 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
26 Safety
(Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
(Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
The right side and left side rear passenger
seating positions have exposed metal
anchors located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Convertible
Lower anchor and top tether anchor loca-
tions, Sport Sedan and SportCombi.
Convertible has two top tether anchors,
one behind each head restraint
93_U S_M 07.book Page 26 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
27Safety
LATCH child seat installation
Before starting the installation, please read
through this instruction, and the child seat
installation instruction.
1 Place the child restraint on one of the
designated outboard rear seat cush-
ions.
2 Slide the attachment on the child
restraint in between the seat cushion
and backrest.
3 Press the child restraint down on the
seat, 1 in illustration.
4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
up the inner restraint attachment arm
with the label, 2 in illustration.
5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
6 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint attachment
arms are properly attached to the bars.
7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 28
and 30.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorage
bars and the top tether strap.
For the top tether, only use the strap sup-
plied with the child restraint.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Use the integrated harness to restraint the
child, according to the child restraint manu-
facturers instructions.
The availability of LATCH child restraints is
limited.
Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top
tether
Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
top tether
93_U S_M 07.book Page 27 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
28 Safety
Child top tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Sport Sedan
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
The car is provided with three top tether
anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
child restraint, 1 in illustration.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
4 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
illustration.
6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3
in illustration.
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
WARNING
Child top tether anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
Child top tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan
93_U S_M 07.book Page 28 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
29Safety
Child top tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
SportCombi
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
The top tether anchors are located on the
back of the rear seat frame above the floor
for each rear seating position.
The car is provided with three top tether
anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
1 If the anchor for the desired seating
position is not in the upright position then
fold down the rear seatback(s) to access
the anchor(s).
2 Fold the backrest back upright.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
5 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
6 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
WARNING
Child top tether anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top
tether strap through the cargo net in such
a way that there is slack in the strap to the
child seat.
Child top tether anchorages, SportCombi
93_U S_M 07.book Page 29 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
30 Safety
Child top tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Convertible
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
The car is provided with two top tether
anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
1 Remove the head restraint on the seat-
ing position where the child restraint
shall be fitted.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
6 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
7 Put the head restraint back on and make
sure it is securely mounted. Adjust it in
its highest position.
WARNING
Child top tether anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
WARNING
If the size of the child restraint makes it
impossible to put the head restraint back
on, place it in the trunk.
How to take away the head restraint
1 Raise the head restraint
2 Push the catch forward and pull the head
restraint straight upward
Top tether anchorages in the rear seat
93_U S_M 07.book Page 30 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
31Safety
Installation of child restraint
using the standard safety belt
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
If fitting a child restraint that is intended to be
secured in position by the standard safety
belt, make use of the locking function of the
belt.
Locking the belt lessens the risk that the
seat will work loose while the car is in
motion.
1 Position the child restraint in the back
seat.
2 Route the belt in the restraint according
to the installation instruction of the
restraint.
3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.
Clicking sound indicates that the lock
function is in work.
4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
child restraint in position.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the belt. The belt must not
unreel.
The safety belt locking function will be deac-
tivated when the safety belt is retracted.
1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
buckle.
2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
restraint, according to the instructions
from the child restraint manufacturer.
3 Let the safety belt retract until the click-
ing sound ceases.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of child restraint
systems can cause your child to strike the
vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or
crash.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 31 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
32 Safety
Airbag
Airbag system components
Airbag in steering wheel
Airbag in instrument panel in front of
passenger seat
Side airbags in front seat backrests
Convertible: The side airbags help
protect the head also
Inflatable curtains along length of headlin-
ing (from front to rear roof pillars)
(Sport Sedan and SportCombi only)
Safety belt pretensioners for front seats
Convertible: and outer rear seats.
The airbag system supplements the protec-
tion provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of occupants taller than
59 in. (150 cm).
When the system is activated at the moment
of impact, the airbag inflates and then
deflates through holes in the back. The
whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,
quicker than the blink of an eye.
The steering wheel and passenger airbags
are so-called smart airbags. The driver and
passenger airbag system compensates for
safety belt usage and the force of the crash
at the moment of impact.
There are two impact sensors on the front
bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
soon after the moment of impact, these
register that the car is involved in a crash.
Using this information and data from the
central sensor in the control module, the
control module determines whether or not to
inflate the airbags. The control module also
controls whether other components of the
airbag system are to be deployed: safety
belt pretensioners, inflatable curtains (Sport
Sedan and SportCombi) and roll over bars
(Convertible).
Which airbag system components are
deployed depends on a number of factors,
such as the force of the crash and the angle
of impact.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alent to a high-speed crash (airbags inflated
to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
be activated (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
see page 42.
If a fault arises in the airbag system during
a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
main instrument panel will come on and the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
WARNING
To reduce risk of death or serious injury:
Always wear your safety belt.
Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls
comfortably.
Passengers 12 and under or shorter
than 59 inches (150 cm) must always
travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted
with a passenger airbag.
Never fit a child seat in front of the
passenger airbag.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact service.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 32 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
33Safety
The driver and passenger front airbags are
triggered by violent front-end crashes. They
are not activated by minor front-end
impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and
side-impacts.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
Note:
Impact sensors react differently depending
on whether or not the front safety belts on
the driver’s and passenger sides are used.
Situations can therefore arise where only
one of the airbags inflates. It is also possible
for only the safety belt pretensioners to be
activated and for the airbags to remain unin-
flated.
If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
impact, Stage II will automatically be acti-
vated later to neutralize the gas generator in
the airbag.
Both front airbags inflatedInflated airbag (drivers side).
Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
approx. 0.1 s
93_U S_M 07.book Page 33 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
34 Safety
Airbag system
1 Steering wheel with integral airbag
2 Passenger airbag
3 Side airbag
4 Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
5 Sensors in front bumper
6 Sensor, side-impact protection
7 Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
8 Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 34 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
35Safety
WARNING
Even if the car is equipped with
AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
Always sit with the whole of your back
in contact with the backrest of the seat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical.Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
instance.
Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some
circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
If the airbag warning light remains
on after the car has been started or
comes on while you are driving, have
the car checked immediately. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer. The warning light could signify
that the airbags may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate with-
out a crash. See page 85.
Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
tion should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as
possible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyes thoroughly with clean water for at
least 20 minutes.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 35 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
36 Safety
Front passenger seat
The system is the same as that used on the
driver’s side.
The airbag systems are interconnected and
have a common warning light . The pas-
senger airbag module is housed in the
fascia above the glove box and is marked
"AIRBAG".
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
WARNING
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
WARNING
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 59 inches
(150 cm) can be killed by the
airbag
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
for children
NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
The glove box must be closed while
travelling. An open glove box door
could cause leg injuries in the event of
a crash.
Operation of the steering wheel airbag in
a front-end crash
Moment of impact.
Sensors detect a
deceleration and send
a signal via the control
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the
airbag.
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
Airbag now fully
inflated.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 36 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
37Safety
Passenger Sensing System
Vehicles with a passenger sensing system
have indicator LEDs on the facia. The indi-
cators will be lit during the system check
when you turn the ignition switch to ST or
ON. When the system check is complete,
either the ON or the OFF LED, will be lit. See
Airbag warning light on page 85. If your
vehicle does not have the indicators pic-
tured, then your vehicle does not have the
passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system will turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and side airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags is not part of the pas-
senger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front pas-
senger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if
the passenger’s frontal airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear rather
than the front seat.
Never place anything on the dash or in
front of the seat as, in addition to being
a hazard to passengers, this could
interfere with the function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
applies to the mounting of accessories
on the dash.
Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the dash, on the seat or out of
the window.
Do not carry anything in your lap.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
U.S.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
Canada
93_U S_M 07.book Page 37 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
38 Safety
Saab recommends that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accom-
modate a rear-facing child restraint. A label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-
facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great, if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag if:
the right front passenger seat is unoccu-
pied
the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat
the system determines that a small child
is present in a forward-facing child
restraint
the system determines that a small child
is present in a booster seat
a right front passenger takes his/her
weight off of the seat for a period of time
the right front passenger seat is occupied
by a smaller person, such as a child who
has outgrown child restraints
or if there is a critical problem with the
airbag system or the passenger sensing
system.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
Saab recommends that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat,but if a child restraint
has been installed and the on indicator is lit,
turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Installation of child restraint using the stan-
dard safety belt on page 31.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and
restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still
lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s
seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and
adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also
make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this hap-
pens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflat-
ing airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the passen-
ger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Saab recommends that rear-
facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 38 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
39Safety
The passenger sensing system is designed
to enable (may inflate) the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system
has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the pas-
senger sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating pos-
ture and body build. Everyone in your vehi-
cle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly
whether or not there is an airbag for that per-
son.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator
is lit, it could be because that person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens,
turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright posi-
tion, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat
covers, can affect how well the passenger
sensing system operates. You may want to
consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehi-
cle for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
WARNING
If the airbag readiness light in the instru-
ment panel cluster ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system. If this ever
happens, havethe vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag warning lamp on
page 43 for more on this, including impor-
tant safety information.
WARNING
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 39 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
40 Safety
Head protection
The pillar trim and headlining (not Converti-
ble soft top) are designed to absorb energy,
softening possible blows to the head. After
a crash, these items must be changed in the
seat positions that were occupied. Never fit
accessories to the pillar trim or headlining
as these could reduce the effectiveness of
the head protection and inflatable curtain
(Sport Sedan and SportCombi).
Side-impact protection
The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body (head also in Convertible), are
integrated in the outside edges of the front
seat backrests. The side impact protection
of the Sport Sedan and SportCombi also
includes inflatable curtains (see page 42).
The side impact protection will be activated
if certain predetermined conditions are met
such as the force and angle of the impact,
the speed of the car on impact, and at which
point on the car´s side the impact occurs.
WARNING
This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra seat cover should be
fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either.
Never place any object in the area that
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
For optimum protection, sit upright in
the seat, with your safety belt correctly
fastened.
The side-impact protection will only be
activated in the event of a side-on
crash and not in the event of a rear-
end crash or the car rolling over. For
the Convertible’s Roll-over protection
see page 76.
Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must be repaired immediately.
We recommend that you contact a
Saab dealer.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 40 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
41Safety
The side-impact protection is only activated
on the side of impact, while the safety belt
pretensioners on both sides are deployed.
The front seats and outer rear seats have
safety belt pretensioners.
There are two sensors on each side of the
car, one at the rear of each door sill and one
in the lower part of each C-pillar.
Convertible: The Convertible has two side
impact protection sensors, one on each side
of the car. These are located at the rear of
the sills.
Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Inflated side airbag with head protection,
Convertible
93_U S_M 07.book Page 41 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
42 Safety
Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
The inflatable curtains, which protect the
head, are concealed along the lengths of
the headlining (all the way from front to rear
roof pillars).
The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
time as the side airbags in the front seats in
case of a side-on impact.
The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
into the window area between the front and
rear roof pillars.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
for the steering wheel and passenger
airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
deployed.
WARNING
Do not sit with your head resting
against the side window. The inflat-
able curtain is designed to inflate
between the window and the head.
Resting the head against the window
could prevent the inflatable curtain
from providing the intended
protection.
Hang only light clothes from the hooks
on the rear seat courtesy handles. The
items of clothing must not contain
heavy or sharp objects. Do not use
wire coat hangers.
Do not position a sun visor or similar
item in the area that would be filled by
the inflatable curtain.
To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the roof pillars
and headlining incorporate cushioning
material. Do not attach anything to the
car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
panels as this could prevent the side-
impact protection from providing the
intended protection.
Do not stack loads so high that they
could encumber the inflatable curtain
in the event of a crash.
Inflated inflatable curtain, Sport Sedan
93_U S_M 07.book Page 42 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
43Safety
For optimal protection, do not sit too close to
the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
someone is sleeping in the car. The inflat-
able curtain comes down from the headlin-
ing and covers a large portion of the side
windows.
Airbag warning lamp What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-
nents of the airbag module - the steering
wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passen-
ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. See page 85.
The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Prohibited seating position
93_U S_M 07.book Page 43 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
44 Safety
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield break-
age may also occur from the right front pas-
senger airbag.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for your airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag system
will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 278.
Let only qualified technicians work on
your airbag system. Improper service can
mean that your airbag system will not
work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice:
If you damage the covering for
the driver's or the right front passenger's
airbag, or the side impact airbag cover-
ing on the ceiling near the side windows,
the bag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger's airbag, or side impact
airbag module and ceiling covering for
the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
Servicing the airbag system
The airbag system must be inspected as
part of the normal service program but oth-
erwise may be regarded as maintenance-
free.
Scrapping or working on airbag
and belt pretensioners
WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but can not get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing prob-
lems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
WARNING
Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
During any welding, both battery
cables must be disconnected and
covered.
Before quick drying paint in the vicinity
of the electronic control module, the
module’s grounding points and wiring
must be covered.
Airbags and safety belt pretensioners
must be deployed under controlled
conditions before the car is scrapped
or any of the system’s components are
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 44 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
45Safety
Frequently asked questions on
function of the airbag
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air-
bags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag system compo-
nents merely supplement the car’s normal
safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
will only be actuated in a moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
of course, that they provide no protection in
minor frontal crashes, major rear- or side-
crashes or if the car rolls over.
The safety belts help to reduce the sideway
movement of the body in a crash.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult, before they
are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
crash.
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tance between you and the airbag. For short
drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
When do the airbags in the steering wheel
and passenger side of the dash board
inflate?
The airbag will only be inflated under certain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, and the resistance to deformation of
the impacting object.
The airbag can only be activated once in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
What won’t trigger the airbag?
The airbag will not be activated in all frontal
crashes. For instance, if the car has hit
something relatively soft and yielding (e.g. a
snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a
The car's impact protection consists of
several different safety features
including the airbags, seatbelts, steer-
ing wheel, seats and dashboard.
These parts are co-ordinated with
each other to provide optimum protec-
tion in the event of a collision, so never
install an airbag from one car into
another.
There is no guarantee that it would
then work satisfactorily in the event of
a collision..
All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must be carried out by autho-
rized personnel only.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 45 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
46 Safety
low impact speed, the airbag will not neces-
sarily be triggered.
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is of an very short duration and will not
damage your hearing. For a short time after-
wards you could experience a buzzing
noise in your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the air-
bag.
The back seat is the safest place for chil-
dren.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.
Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
Always use seat belts and child restraints.
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
Are the dust and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several min-
utes complained only of minor irritation of
the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as pos-
sible getting dust on your skin as there is a
risk of skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bring on an attack, in which case you should
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the air-
bags from working properly?
Yes. If you add things that change your vehi-
cle’s frame, bumper system, front end or
side sheet metal or height, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work prop-
erly if you relocate any of the airbag sen-
sors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Saab Customer Assis-
tance before you modify your vehicle. The
phone numbers and addresses for Cus-
tomer Assistance can be found on page
276.
Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module or the inside rearview
mirror can affect the operation of the
advanced airbag system. If you have ques-
tions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance can be found on page 276.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 46 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
47Security
Doors ________________ 48
Central locking ________ 48
Car alarm _____________ 56
Security
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 47 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
48 Security
Doors
Open the door by lifting the door handle.
The following message appears on the
Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is
not closed (text displayed first when vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
door has still not been closed):
Central locking
Remote control
The remote control and ignition key are inte-
grated in one unit, and referred to in this
manual as the remote control.
The remote control contains a mechanical
key, referred to in this manual as the tradi-
tional key. This traditional key can be used
in an emergency to lock or unlock the
driver’s door from outside (see page 50).
This key does not fit the ignition switch.
A key code number is supplied with your
car. This number needs to be quoted for
ordering a new traditional key (contained in
the remote control). Therefore, keep this
number in a safe place.
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked. If the code is
incorrect, the car will not start.
The car is supplied with two remote con-
trols. It is possible to have up to five remote
controls programmed for the car at any one
time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
obtained as soon as possible. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer. When
a new key is programmed into the car, the
lost key will be deprogrammed automati-
cally.
Note:
If a new remote control has to be ordered
and programmed, at least one old one is
required for the locking system’s electronic
unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
control.
Once the new remote control has been pro-
grammed, the old unit that is lost will not
work. Therefore you should carry two
remote controls separately, especially on
long journeys.
Close doors.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 48 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
49Security
Remote control functions
*) parking lights, side direction indicators,
taillights and license plate lighting.
NOTICE
The remote control contains delicate
electronics.
Do not expose it to water.
Avoid rough handling.
Do not place the remote control where
it may be subjected to high tempera-
tures, e.g. on the instrument panel.
Warm the remote control in your
hands for a couple of minutes if it has
become very cold to prevent malfunc-
tion.
For details on changing the battery,
refer to page 54.
Button Pressed once Pressed
twice
Hold and
press the
button more
than 2 s
Locks all doors.
Unlocks driver´s
door.
Sport Sedan:
The other
doors are
unlocked.
SportCombi:
The other
doors and tail-
gate are
unlocked.
Comfort
opening, see
page 119.
Sport Sedan:
Unlocks and
slightly opens
the trunk lid.
SportCombi:
Unlocks the tail-
gate.
Checks number
of remote con-
trols, see
page 53.
Turns on exterior
and cabin light-
ing *) (for 30 s) or
turns off lighting
and deactivates
panic alarm.
Panic alarm
(activates
alarm manu-
ally), see
page 58.
Remote control
1 Locks car
2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting
3 Unlocks and opens trunk lid.
4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.
Activates panic function
93_U S_M 07.book Page 49 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
50 Security
Locking/unlocking the car
Remote locking and unlocking also control
the car alarm.
Remote locking
Press the button once:
Sport Sedan: all doors locked.
SportCombi: all doors and tailgate locked.
The hazard warning lights will flash once to
confirm.
Remote unlocking
Pressing the button once: the driver´s
door is unlocked.
Pressin a second time:
Sport Sedan: the rest of the doors are
unlocked.
SportCombi: the rest of the doors and tail-
gate are unlocked.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
confirm.
Saab Information Display (SID), see
page 89.
Intermittent malfunctioning
Equipment in the vicinity of the car that uses
the same frequency as the remote control
may cause interference to the remote con-
trol signal. In this case, retry from another
angle and aim at the receiver located by the
steering wheel.
If remote unlocking should fail to work
1 Remove the traditional key from the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse of the remote control.
(This key only fits the front left-hand
door.)
2 Unlock the door with the key.
The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
alarm, insert the remote control into the igni-
tion switch.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Never lock anyone in the car.
Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
with the traditional key
1 Lock
2 Unlock
93_U S_M 07.book Page 50 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
52 Security
Switches on front doors
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car using the button by each
front door handle.
Locking the car with the remote control ren-
ders these buttons inoperative.
Sport Sedan
If you are sitting in the car and pressing the
button on the driver’s door, the driver’s
door will unlock. Pressing the button a
second time will unlock the remaining
doors.
SportCombi
If you are sitting in the car and pressing the
button on the driver’s door, the driver’s
door will unlock. Pressing the button a
second time will unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate.
The button on the passenger door works in
the same way except that this first unlocks
the passenger door. During this operation
the rear doors remain locked.
If the car is left with one or more doors open,
the interior lighting will be switched off auto-
matically after 20 minutes. This is to prevent
the battery from running flat. Also, if the car
has electrically adjustable seats, these will
cease to operate.
Child safety locks
WARNING
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
Central locking switch Child safety locks
93_U S_M 07.book Page 52 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
53Security
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are activated by means of
a catch next to the door latch.
Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
(enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
45°.
When the child safety lock is in the locked
position, the door can only be opened from
outside the car.
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be
reprogrammed. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer (see page 295).
Checking the number of remote
controls
To check the number of remote controls that
are programmed for the car:
1 Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch and turn it to ON.
2 Press and hold the button for more
than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to
the ON position.
3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
now display the number of remote
controls that are programmed for your
car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
ignition switch.
Example of SID message:
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it
Number of keys:
Active key number:
Trunk Release Handle
93_U S_M 07.book Page 53 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
54 Security
Changing the key battery
When the voltage of the remote control
battery drops below a certain level, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Change the battery as soon as possible to
avoid malfunctioning.
Battery type: For optimum performance in
all temperatures and good service life, Saab
recommends the use of a Sony or Pana-
sonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.
The battery should last for about 4 years of
normal use.
The battery type is marked on the inside of
the remote control. Avoid leaving finger-
prints on the faces of the battery.
1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
remote control to remove the traditional
key.
2 Insert the tip of the key into the small slot
and turn the key to split the remote
control.
WARNING
Keep the battery and other small compo-
nents of the remote control out of reach of
children.
NOTICE
The electronics of the remote control are
sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Incor-
rect handling when changing the battery
can damage the remote control. Avoid
touching electronic components of the
remote control with your hands.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Press the emblem to remove
the traditional key
93_U S_M 07.book Page 54 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
55Security
3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery
so that it is positioned in the same way
as the old battery, with the positive (+)
side facing down.
4 Fit the two halves of the remote control
together and press them together until
you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing
the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key
into the remote control.
5 After changing the battery in the remote
control, it is only possible to use the
remote control a limited number of times
before synchronization with the car is
lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons
on the remote control repeatedly directly
after changing the battery.
Unlock the car and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch to
synchronize the remote control and car.
If the central locking system does not work
after changing the battery and the car is
locked, proceed as follows:
1 Unlock the front left door with the tradi-
tional key. If the car has a car alarm, this
will be tripped.
2 Open the door and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch. If the car
has a car alarm, this will be silenced.
The remote control and receiver unit are
now synchronized.
Immobilizer
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked and the LED on
the dashboard double-flashes for
3 seconds. If the code is correct, the car can
be started.
Each time you remove the remote control
from the ignition, the electronic starting
interlock is activated, the LED double-
flashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
immobilized. If an incorrect remote control is
now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
the remote control of another car), the
immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possi-
ble to start the car.
If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
there is a problem checking the electronic
code of the remote control, the following
message will appear on the SID:
Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Change the battery and fit together
the two halves of the remote control
93_U S_M 07.book Page 55 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
56 Security
Car alarm
The car alarm is armed when the car is
locked with the remote control.
The car alarm will not be armed if you
lock the car with the traditional key (see
page 50).
All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are
monitored by the alarm.
The alarm is armed 11 seconds after the car
has been locked by remote control.
During the delay period, the LED shines
constantly. It will then start to flash once
every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
dashboard.
If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
is locked with the remote control, the LED
will flash 3 times per second for
11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
and trunk lid are closed.
If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
to have the problem checked and rectified.
Locking the trunk lid:
Sport Sedan
If you open the trunk lid from outside the car
with the button on the remote control,
you must lock the car with the button to
arm the car alarm.
SportCombi
If you unlock and/or open the trunk lid from
outside the car with the button on the
remote control, you must lock the car with
the button to arm the car alarm.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 56 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
57Security
To avoid any inconvenience, make sure that
anyone using the car is familiar with how the
car alarm and the locking system work.
If the alarm has been tripped since the car
was last locked, the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID) will display:
If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Arming the car alarm
The alarm is armed when all doors, the hood
and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
car with the remote control.
What trips the alarm?
The alarm will be tripped if:
a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
somebody tries to hotwire the car
Signals when the alarm is tripped
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
The signals can vary between markets
and due to legal and insurance require-
ments.
Switching off the alarm if tripped
If the alarm has been triggered (direction
indicators flashing and horn sounding) it can
be turned off by pressing one of the buttons
on the remote control or, if you are sitting in
the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see
below).
Alarm tripped during
last arming period.
Theft protection failure.
Contact service.
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks car.
Turns off lights and horn.
Car remains locked.
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks trunk.
Turns off lights and horn.
Turns on exterior and cabin light-
ing. Car remains locked.
If sitting in the car: Turn the remote
control to ON in the ignition switch
NOTICE
It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same
time unlock the car, if the button on the
key is pressed by mistake when the
car is still within its range.
When locking the car by remote
control in extremely cold weather, it is
advisable to check that the lock
system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking
buttons are all down.
If not, unlock and relock the car again.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 57 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
59Security
Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display
(SID) messages
Activity LED signal
Arming (delay period) Illuminates for 11 s.
Alarm armed Flashes once every 3 s.
Disarming Extinguishes.
Alarm not armed Off.
A door, the hood or the tailgate is
open or opened during the delay
period.
Flashes for 11 s then flashes
once every 3 s.
Car immobilized but not locked. Off.
Change of status of immobilizer
system, valid remote control
inserted or removed from ignition
switch.
Double-flashes for 3 s.
SID message Reason/action
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Error when remote control
inserted into ignition switch.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Battery needs replacing.
See page 54.
Number of keys:
Active key number:
Check of the number of remote
controls programmed for your
car. See page 53.
Alarm tripped during
last arming period.
The alarm has been tripped
since the car was last locked.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 59 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
60 Security
(This page has been left blank.)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 60 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
619-3 Convertible
Advice on soft top
operation ___________ 62
Operating the soft top__ 63
Raising the soft top
manually ___________ 68
SID warnings and
messages __________ 71
"Easy entry"__________ 73
Head restraints _______ 74
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible _________ 75
Rollover Pop-up Bars ___ 76
Electric windows_______ 77
Interior lighting ________ 78
Unlocking the trunk lid
manually ____________ 79
Placing two golf bags
in the trunk __________ 80
9-3 Convertible
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 61 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
62 9-3 Convertible
Advice on soft top
operation
Once you have raised the soft top and
before driving off, always check that the
soft top is properly engaged with the wind-
shield rail, see page 66.
Once you have folded the soft top and
before driving off, check that the soft top
cover is locked, see page 64.
Do not operate the soft top in tempera-
tures below 23°F (–5°C).
Note that certain automatic car washes
can damage the soft top. This applies to
car washes that use mechanical feelers
bearing against the body. Saab advises
against washing the Convertible in an
automatic car wash.
After rain or washing the car, allow the
soft top to dry completely before folding it.
Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause
water damage in the car and mildew to
form on the soft top.
Roof racks and ski holders must not be
mounted on the soft top.
On no account should anything be put into
the stowage space of the soft top (under
the soft top cover) since this could cause
an obstruction when the soft top is being
folded away.
Do not place any objects on the covers
over the roll bars as this can hamper their
function.
When operating the soft top, raise or fold
it fully until notified that operation is
complete by the SID. Do not leave the soft
top partially open/closed. If the soft top is
left in an intermediate position it will
collapse progressively after 20 seconds
to prevent overloading the drive system.
Washing the soft top, see page 261.
WARNING
Never touch the hinges and struts of
the soft top nor the upper rail of the
windshield while operating the soft
top.
Do not operate the soft top while there
are bystanders close to the car.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 62 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
639-3 Convertible
Operating the soft top
Read the "Advice on soft top operation"
section on page 62 before operating the soft
top.
The soft top is operated with the switch on
the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the
desired position until the soft top is fully
folded or raised.
The completion of folding or raising the soft
top is indicated by a chime.
Error messages that can appear on the SID
are shown on page 71.
WARNING
Do not touch the hinges or struts of the
soft top during opening due to the
pinch hazard.
Keep children out of reach.
Do not operate the soft top while there
are bystanders close to the car.
Make sure that the soft top cover has
locked properly after folding the soft
top.
Check that the soft top engages prop-
erly with the upper edge of the wind-
shield after raising.
NOTICE
If you drive off while raising or folding the
soft top, operation is halted when
the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h). This speed can be
programmed (0–20 mph/0–30 km/h). We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer. The movement of the car and
force of the wind can seriously damage
the components of the soft top system.
Switch for operating the soft top
aRaising
b Folding
93_U S_M 07.book Page 63 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
64 9-3 Convertible
Opening
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
the soft top to be folded:
Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
Outside temperature must exceed 23°F
(–5°C).
The trunk lid must be locked.
There must be sufficient space in the
trunk for the soft top.
1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance
for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
the soft top is fully folded and the soft top
cover raised. Completed folding is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 71.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while folding the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
If you continue to hold the button after the
chime, all the windows will open after a brief
delay.
Remote opening 3
You can fold the soft top when outside the
car by pressing and holding the
(unlock) button on the remote control. See
also page 119.
Folding
93_U S_M 07.book Page 64 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
659-3 Convertible
3 Soft top folded. 4 The soft top cover is closed.1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in
luggage compartment lowered.
2 The soft top cover is opened.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b2" (5cm)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 65 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
66 9-3 Convertible
Raising
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
raising the soft top:
Vehicle speed must not exceed
20 mph (30 km/h).
Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
The trunk lid must be locked.
1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance
for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
the soft top is fully raised and the soft top
cover closed. Completed raising is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 71.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while raising the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
All side windows are opened slightly to pro-
tect the seals when the soft top is raised.
Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it
securely to the upper edge of the wind-
shield.
If you hold the button pressed up after the
chime, all the windows will be closed after a
short delay.
Raising
93_U S_M 07.book Page 66 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
679-3 Convertible
1 The soft top cover is opened. 2 The soft top is raised. 3 The soft top cover is closed.
4 The rear window is lowered.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b2" (5cm
93_U S_M 07.book Page 67 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
68 9-3 Convertible
Raising the soft top
manually
If the soft top has been folded mechanically
there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it
is possible to raise it manually (the pressure
must be released from the hydraulic sys-
tem).
If the car is without electrical power, the
trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to
page 79.
1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and
screwdriver located under the luggage
compartment floor.
2 Remove the two covers from the side
trim in the trunk, one from either side.
If there are two of you, it is easiest if you
stand on either side of the car and perform
steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.
3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing
forward the two wire catches, one on the
left and one on right-hand side.
WARNING
Only raise the soft top manually in an
emergency (e.g. due to an electrical
fault).
Do not touch the soft top button on the
instrument panel while closing the soft top
manually. This could cause personal
injury and damage the soft top mecha-
nism.
Do not fold the soft top having closed it
manually. This can damage the soft top
mechanism.
Tools under luggage compartment floor
Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover
93_U S_M 07.book Page 68 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
699-3 Convertible
4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it
will obstruct the soft top cover.
5 Open the soft top cover, upward and
backward.
6 Tip forward the front seat backrests.
7 Before raising the soft top, the two
catches in the leading edge of the soft
top must be opened. Stand in the rear
seat and pry off the cover with the screw-
driver (the cover is fitted on the covering
in between the catches). Using the tool,
turn clockwise to open the catches.
Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft
top. Pull it towards the windshield. This
operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of verti-
cal clearance.
WARNING
Do not touch the hinges and struts of
the soft top during raising.
Keep your hands clear of the front
windshield rail.
Pinch hazard may cause personal
injury.
Soft top cover opened Manual closing started Soft top pulled towards windshield
93_U S_M 07.book Page 69 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
70 9-3 Convertible
8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the
soft top to the windshield rail. Use the lug
wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly
1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that
the soft top is properly locked in place by
pressing up the front edge. The soft top
must not move upward.
9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it
there. Close the soft top cover. It is not
possible to lock the soft top cover after
manual raising.
10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top
as far as possible towards the soft top
cover.
11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top
cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the
tool (the same tool as used to lock the
soft top to the windshield rail) into the
hexagonal hole in the soft top mecha-
nism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counter-
clockwise on the right had side of the
soft top and clockwise on the left-hand
side. Look at the soft top cover when
locking the rear window. The rear
window must make a tight seal against
the soft top cover.
The soft top system must be checked and
rectified without delay. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the paintwork on the
soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care
when closing the soft top cover.
Closing the soft top cover Rear window locked to soft top coverSoft top locked to windshield rail
93_U S_M 07.book Page 70 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
719-3 Convertible
Cause Suitable action
Soft top front
not locked.
Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to
the windshield.
Move the car so that it is standing level if on
a steep slope.
Press the soft top button to fold the soft top
slightly. Fold the soft top again.
Soft top power pack
overheated.
This message appears if the soft top is operated
continuously for more than 3 minutes.
Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to
cool down.
Move goods away from
soft top storage area.
Move the object hindering soft top operation.
Operation at low temp.
may damage soft top.
Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures
below 23°F (–5°C).
Only manual operation
possible.
Soft top cover not
locked. Try again.
SID warnings and messages
The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:
93_U S_M 07.book Page 71 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
72 9-3 Convertible
Battery low. The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow
soft top operation.
Soft top obstructed.
Clear obstacles.
Complete soft top
operation to open trunk.
Complete soft top operation.
Complete soft top
operation before driving
Complete soft top operation.
Close doors. Close the trunk lid.
Driver seat unlocked. The backrest is not locked. Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 73.
Passenger front seat
unlocked.
The backrest is not locked. Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 73.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 72 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
739-3 Convertible
"Easy entry"
To facilitate getting in and out of the rear
seat, the front seats can be slid forward.
Manually adjusted passenger seats 3
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat.
2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat
forward.
Repositioning:
1 Tip back the backrest.
2 Slide the seat back to the desired
position.
Make sure the backrest and seat are prop-
erly locked in position.
Electrically adjustable front seats 3
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat.
2 Tip the backrest forward.
3 The seat now moves to its foremost
position.
Repositioning:
1 Tip the backrest back to its normal
position.
2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
has returned to its previous position.
Repositioning (seats without memory):
1 Tip the backrest back but not to its
normal position.
2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
has returned to its previous position.
3 Release the handle and move the back-
rest to locked position.
WARNING
Always check that the backrest locks
properly when returned to normal
position.
Check that the fore-and-aft position of
the seat is properly locked. The back-
rest and the entire belt-in seat must be
locked in position; otherwise the occu-
pant of the seat is at risk of injury
during braking or in the event of a
crash, especially if a rear-facing child
seat is fitted behind the backrest.
"Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat
3
93_U S_M 07.book Page 73 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
74 9-3 Convertible
Head restraints
The front seats are equipped with Saab
Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus lim-
iting the backward movement of the head.
The front seat head restraints must be set at
a height where at least one notch is visible
on the rear of the head restraint stem (pole).
In this position the vertical distance between
the top of the seat back and the head
restraint should be greater than 30 mm
when measured at the rear. See page 23.
Under no circumstances should the front
seat head restraint be forced down below
this position.
The front head restraints can be raised and
lowered to a number of positions, the rear
has two positions.
Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
Lowering: Press the head restraint
forward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
WARNING
Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
Rear head restraintFront head restraint
93_U S_M 07.book Page 74 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
759-3 Convertible
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible
The two rear seats have three-point safety
belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
Refer to page 260 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
For how to secure loads on the rear seat,
refer to page 17.
WARNING
If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
Make sure you use the correct seat-
belt buckle.
Safety belts, rear seat, Convertible
93_U S_M 07.book Page 75 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
76 9-3 Convertible
Rollover Pop-up Bars
The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are
located behind each rear seat head
restraint, are designed to deploy in the
event of a crash or rollover.
WARNING
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt - even if you have airbags and Roll-
over Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety
belt during a crash helps reduce your
chance of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it.
The Rollover Pop Up Bars have
powerful springs that rapidly extend
the bars in rollover crashes, as well as
in moderate to severe crashes in
which the airbags deploy. Rollover
Pop Up Bars are supplemental to the
safety belts. They are designed to
work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with
great force, and you could be injured if
your arm or other body part, or if an
object is covering the bars when they
deploy. Don't put anything on the
cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.
The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars
must be kept clear.
The Rollover Pop Up Bars are
designed to deploy only once. If they
deploy, take your vehicle to a work-
shop immediately to have the Rollover
Pop Up Bars repaired so that they
operate properly in the event of a
crash or rollover. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
To avoid the risk of damage to the soft top
do not operated the soft top while the
bars are extended.
Rollover Pop-up Bars
93_U S_M 07.book Page 76 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
779-3 Convertible
Electric windows
To open
Soft top raised – The windows open individ-
ually.
Soft top folded – The button for the front
window opens both side windows.
Automatic opening
Press the button all the way down and
release it. If the soft top is folded, the rear
side window is also lowered.
To close
Soft top raised – The windows are operated
individually.
Soft top folded – The button for the front
window closes both side windows.
Automatic closing of a front side window
Raise the button all the way and release it.
The rear side window must be fully closed.
Pinch protection 3 is available for the front
side windows.
For further information on the electric win-
dows, refer to page 119.
Deactivating the passenger door
window button
With the button on the driver’s door,
you can deactivate the window button on
the passenger door.
The illuminated switch will change color
from green to amber (deactivated).
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the activation of the
electric windows, for example, due to
children playing.
The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
Window switches
93_U S_M 07.book Page 77 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
78 9-3 Convertible
Calibrating front electric
windows with pinch protection 3
The window lifts should be calibrated if auto-
matic closing does not work or if the battery
has been disconnected. The pinch protec-
tion will not work if the windows are not
calibrated.
Perform calibration as follows:
1 Make sure the soft top is raised.
2 Make sure the doors are closed.
3 Let the engine idle.
4 Press and hold the soft top button up
until a chime sounds.
During calibration, the four windows will
be raised and lowered several times.
If calibration fails twice in a row, have the car
checked and rectified. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of a front roof
light, two front reading lights, footwell light-
ing and courtesy lighting in the doors. The
light switches are located in the roof con-
sole.
The cabin lighting comes on:
When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
The lighting goes out:
When the car is locked.
When the ignition is turned on.
Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,
the interior lighting goes out automatically
after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.
The interior lighting can be switched off
completely.
1 Open the driver’s door.
2 Turn off the cabin lighting with the center
button, see illustration.
This is canceled when the ignition switch is
turned to position ON or when the car is
locked with the remote control.
Front interior lighting - Convertible
1 Left-hand reading light
2 Cabin light
3 Right-hand reading light
93_U S_M 07.book Page 78 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
799-3 Convertible
Glove box
The glove box lighting comes on when the
compartment is opened and goes out when
it is closed.
For changing bulbs, refer to page 230.
Sun visor
An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on
the inside of the sun visors. The lighting
comes on when the cover is raised and goes
out when it is closed.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting comes on and goes out
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 min to
prevent the battery from running flat.
For changing bulbs, refer to page 232.
Unlocking the trunk lid
manually
If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central
locking system, it can be unlocked
manually.
1 Take the traditional key out of the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse (see page 54).
2 Carefully prise off the round cover using
your nails, a credit card or similar so as
not to damage the paintwork.
3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional
key.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer to have the central locking system
checked.
Unlocking the trunk lid manually
93_U S_M 07.book Page 79 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
80 9-3 Convertible
Placing two golf bags
in the trunk
There is sufficient space in the trunk of the
Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as
follows.
1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the
first bag to the right.
2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it
lies on its widest side and slide it
forward, in under the soft top storage
(see illustration).
3 Put in the second bag in the same way
as the first, but lie it on its narrow side
(see illustration).
Spoiler on trunklid 3
Wind deflector 3
A wind deflector is available as an acces-
sory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied
with the wind deflector carefully.
WARNING
Some models have a spoiler on the trunk-
lid. Avoid getting fingers and hands
trapped between the spoiler and rear
fender when closing the trunklid.
Position of first golf bag Position of second golf bag
93_U S_M 07.book Page 80 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
81Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator
lights _______________ 82
Instruments ___________ 87
Saab Information Display
(SID)________________ 89
Switches _____________ 97
Wipers and washers ____ 101
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)__ 106
Instruments and controls
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 81 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
82 Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator
lights
The warnings and indications that can be
shown depend on the engine variant and
equipment level.
This warning light illuminates when a fault
arises in the antilock brake system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
The brake system will continue to function
but without ABS modulation. See also
page 170.
Antilock braking warning
Antilock brake malfunc.
Contact service.
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer
2 Speedometer
3 Turbo gauge
4 Fuel gauge
5 Engine temperature gauge
6 Information display
7 Trip meter reset button
Main instrument panel
U.S. shown, Canada similar
93_U S_M 07.book Page 82 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
83Instruments and controls
This light comes on when the battery is not
being charged by the alternator. If the light
comes on during driving, stop as soon as
possible and switch off the engine.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Check the drive belt, see page 216.
This light will come on if the engine oil pres-
sure is too low. If the warning light flashes or
comes on while you are driving, stop imme-
diately in a safe place, switch off the engine
and check the oil level (see page 207).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Charge warning light
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
NOTICE
Never drive the car when the oil pressure
warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can
cause serious engine damage.
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
WARNING
An illuminated “Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
cates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
“Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 83 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
84 Instruments and controls
This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
or ignition system. The car may still be
driven with care but the performance of the
engine will be somewhat diminished (see
page 154).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
This light shows when the high beam is on
(see page 98).
This light indicates when the front fog lights
are on (see page 99).
The front fog lights are switched off auto-
matically when the engine is switched off.
When the fog lights are next needed, they
will have to be switched on manually.
This light should come on briefly when you
turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn´t come
on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem. This light indicates
when the brake fluid level is too low (see
page 211).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 211).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
the level again. If the level is still normal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest workshop to have the
brake system checked. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
Reduced engine power.
Contact service.
NOTICE
The car should be checked immediately
at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
faults from arising.
High beam Indicator
Front fog lights 3
Brake warning light
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
WARNING
Never drive the car if these two lights
are on at the same time. Danger of
brake failure!
If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir is below the MIN mark, the vehicle
should be transported on a recovery
vehicle.
Have the brake system checked
immediately at a Saab dealer.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 84 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
85Instruments and controls
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distrib-
utes the brake pressure between the front
and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s load.
If a fault arises in the EBD function, the ,
and lights will come on. Also, the
following message will appear on the Saab
Information Display (SID):
If this is the case, drive carefully and contact
a workshop as soon as possible. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer. Refer
to Brake warning light on page 84, Antilock
braking warning on page 82 and ESP
®
OFF
indicator on page 86.
This light reminds the driver to buckle up,
see page 12.
This light comes on when the parking brake
is applied (see page 177).
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
If the parking brake is applied when the car
starts off, the following message will appear
on the SID:
This light comes on if a potentially serious
fault has occurred in the airbag system, see
also page 32.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
This light will come on for about four sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position.
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Safetybelt reminder
Parking brake warning
light
Release park brake.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 177.
Always apply the parking brake
before removing the remote control.
•Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
Airbag warning light
Airbag malfunction.
Contact service.
WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
- Non-deployment of the airbags in the
event of a crash.
- Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in crashes
less severe than intended.
To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 85 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
86 Instruments and controls
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
tank.
This light indicates that the headlights or
parking lights are on.
This light comes on when the system is
engaged.
This symbol lights up when the system is
operative.
Operation of the ESP
®
indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
This symbol lights up when the system is
disengaged using the ESP
®
button.
If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
be turned off by pressing the ESP
®
button.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
If so, have the system checked at a Saab
dealer.
See also Electronic Stability Program
(ESP
®
) 3 on page 175.
Indicator, fuel
NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
Headlight and parking
light indicator
Cruise control indicator
light
ESP
®
indicator
ESP
®
OFF indicator
WARNING
The system improves ride comfort and
safety during normal driving. It must
however not be regarded as a system
to enable the driver to maintain higher
speeds. The same precautions as
normal for safe cornering and driving
on slippery roads must be adopted (see
pages 173/ 175).
Stability control failure.
Contact service.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 86 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
87Instruments and controls
Autochecking of lights, main
instrument panel
The warning and indicator lights shown
above should come on when the ignition
switch is turned to ON. They should go out
after about 4 seconds once the engine has
started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis
of each system or function.
Instruments
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
A protective function (interruption of the fuel
supply) limits the engine speed within the
red zone.
Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer dis-
plays the speed of the car in miles per hour
(mph).
Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer
displays the speed of the car in kilometres
per hour (km/h).
It receives information about vehicle speed
from the ABS’s wheel sensors.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 87 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
88 Instruments and controls
Temperature gauge
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
If the needle goes into the red zone (which
can occur at high outside air temperatures
or under heavy engine loads), choose the
highest possible gear ratio and the lowest
possible engine speed, and avoid shifting
down.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the coolant level (see page 209).
Turbo gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
used for combustion, which is equivalent to
the engine load.
At low loads and when the engine is used for
braking, the needle will move within the
white zone.
Under certain barometric conditions the
needle may enter the first part of the red
zone without necessarily indicating that a
fault has arisen.
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car in a suit-
able place and allow the engine to idle. If
the needle continues to rise, switch off the
engine.
WARNING
Never open the cap of the expansion tank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cooling-
system can cause hot coolant and steam
to be released. Failure to heed this warn-
ing may result in personal injury.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 88 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
89Instruments and controls
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
limiting the boost pressure, you should
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
If the speed of the car exceeds 143 mph
(230 km/h), acceleration is limited by reduc-
ing the boost pressure. The pressure gauge
then moves towards the middle of the white
field, indicating a drop in engine power and
consequently the car’s speed.
Fuel gauge
When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)
of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on
the main instrument panel comes on.
Refueling, see page 157.
Saab Information
Display (SID)
Various types of information are shown
on the SID: warnings, indications, trip
computer information and information
from the car’s Infotainment System.
Selected gear is shown on the left-hand
side of the display. When gears are
selected manually, the letter M (manual)
and the selected gear are displayed (see
page 168) (cars with automatic transmis-
sion).
In the first row trip computer information is
displayed and in the second row odome-
ter and tripmeter is displayed.
When a message is displayed
The odometer and tripmeter is temporarely
turned off when a two row message is dis-
played. The icon is displayed in the left part
of the display.
The warnings and indications that can be
shown on the SID are listed on page 296.
If there is more than one message on the
SID, a plus sign will be displayed to the left
of the first message. Each message will be
displayed for 10 seconds.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 89 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
90 Instruments and controls
Press the CLR button to acknowledge a SID
message. If you acknowledge a message
but do nothing about it, the message will be
displayed again the next time you start the
car.
When the engine is switched off the warn-
ing/indicator lights still active are displayed,
this is to remind the driver. At this point the
warning/indicator lights previously acknowl-
edged with the CLR button are also dis-
played.
You can adjust the settings of several of the
car’s systems, such as the alarm 3, rain
sensor 3 and climate control system. These
are known as Settings se page 94.
Odometer and trip meter
The odometer records the distance trav-
elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana-
dian vehicles the distance indicated is in
kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
on Canadian vehicles).xx
Reset button
The reset button is positioned immediately
to the left of the speedometer.
Press once to resets the trip meter, the igni-
tion shall be in position ON.
Trip computer function of the SID
SID is available in two levels, SID1 and
SID2. which one xx that your car has
depends on the car´s equipment level.
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can
otherwise easily be distracted from the
road.
SID1 contains the following functions:
Temp Outdoor temperature
D.T.E. Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank).
When the possible range is
less than 18 miles (30 km)
then the text Refill fuel now
is displayed.
Fuel Ø Average fuel consumption
since function last reset
SID, control unit and display
93_U S_M 07.book Page 90 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
91Instruments and controls
When the engine is started, the function that
was selected when the engine was
switched off is displayed, with the following
exceptions:
Temp is displayed if the outside tempera-
ture is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C).
D.T.E. is displayed if less than or equal to
30 miles (50 km).
Outdoor temperature
The Temp function is always activated
(even in NIGHTPANEL mode) if the outdoor
temperature rises or falls to between 26 and
38°F (–3 and +3°C).
If the temperature sensor, located under the
front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,
temperature readings will be unreliable.
Setting values
1 Select one of the functions using the
steering wheel controls, or .
Dist (preset to 100 miles (100 km) if not
previously set)
•SpeedØ
Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h)
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Use the steering wheel controls to select
the value. (Press CLR to reset the
value.)
4 Press the SET button to finish setup.
Using DIST as a trip meter
1 Select Dist using the steering wheel
controls, or .
2 Press and hold the CLR button for
approx. 1 second.
An arrow will now appear on the right-hand
side of the display, indicating that the trip
meter is running.
SID2 3 also contains the following fea-
tures:
Dist Distance to destinations.
Function can also be used as
a trip meter
Speed Ø Average speed since func-
tion last reset
Speed W Speed warning (chime)
Settings Settings of features such as
alarm clock, language and
rain sensor 3
Phone 3 Managing of number list, see
Infotainment Manual.
WARNING
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 91 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
92 Instruments and controls
Resetting a single function
1 Select the function you wish to reset
using the steering wheel controls, or
.
Fuel Ø (the value is rest to 10l/100 km)
•SpeedØ
Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
2 Press and hold the CLR button for
approx. 1 second.
The selected function will now be reset.
Resetting the trip computer
Press and hold the CLR button (approx.
3 seconds) until audible confirmation is
given.
The following functions will be rest:
Fuel Ø (the value is reset to 10l/
100 km)
•SpeedØ
D.T.E. (the value is reset to the
distance possible on the remaining fuel
if fuel consumption is 10l/100 km, lower
consumption means a longer possible
distance)
Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
Speed warning
This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).
The value can be set to between 0 and
150 mph (0 and 250 km/h).
1 Select Speed W using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Adjust the speed using the steering
wheel controls.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
The word ON on the right-hand side of the
display indicates when the speed warning
function is active.
An audible alarm will sound if the set speed
is exceeded.
Disengage the function with the CLR button.
Re-engage the function using the SET but-
ton.
Calculating the arrival time
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive?)
This function should be used before starting
out a journey.
To calculate the arrival time, the distance
must first be given.
1 Select Dist using the steering wheel
controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Set the distance to the destination using
the steering wheel controls.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
The calculated arrival time will now appear
on the right-hand side of the display.
If you take a break, this time will be added to
the previously calculated arrival time.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 92 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
93Instruments and controls
You can check the distance left by selecting
Dist. At the same time you can check the
calculated time of arrival.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, Dist will function as a trip
meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter). The
starting value for the trip meter will be the
last distance set for the Dist function.
Example: The Dist function is set to
100 miles. After the count-down has
reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
beginning at 100 miles.
Calculating the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive and know what my average speed will
be?)
This function should be used before starting
out a journey.
First, set the distance under Dist.
1 Then select Speed Ø function.
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Set the estimated average speed using
the steering wheel controls.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
The distance and the calculated time of
arrival is now displayed.
The time of arrival is updated during the
journey based on the average speed since
Dist was set. The speed of the car must
exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
By selecting Dist during the journey, you
can see how much distance is left to travel.
When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
meter. The trip meter starts from the dis-
tance that was set previously.
NIGHTPANEL
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
When the NIGHTPANEL button is pressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated.
All other instrument lighting will be switched
off and the needles drop to zero.
Note: All indicator and warning lights and
messages will operate normally if required.
Temp (when the outside temperature falls
or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
(50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
Panel model.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 93 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
94 Instruments and controls
Under Settings you can choose whether
the entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph)
or only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should
be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Speed Scale Illum.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.
6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Alarm
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Alarm Clock using the steering
wheel controls.
ON or OFF is displayed.
If OFF is shown and the alarm time is to
be set, press SET button (do not keep
held in) and wait for the audible signal.
The previously time set is now shown.
Press SET button.
If ON is shown and the alarm time is to
be activated, press SET button once,
OFF is shown in the display. Press SET
button again to activate the function.
4 Select alarm time using the steering
wheel controls.
5 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
When the alarm sounds push one of the left
steering wheel controls.
Settings
Under this heading you can select for exam-
ple language and units.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select heading using the steering wheel
controls.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select using the steering wheel controls.
6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Select EXIT once you have made the
desired settings.
Settings
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
0–90 mph
93_U S_M 07.book Page 94 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
95Instruments and controls
The number of systems that are displayed
on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
level. The list shown below includes the
systems that can be found in your car.
Rain Sensor, page 103.
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
Theft Alarm, page 56.
FULL ALARM
DOOR ONLY
Park Assistance, page 180.
ON
OFF
Alarm Clock, page 94.
ON
OFF
Language.
ENGLISH UK
ENGLISH US
FRANCAIS
DEUTSCH
ITALIANO
ESPANOL
SVENSKA
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
0–90 mph
Speed Scale Sel.
BOTH SCALES
ONLY MPH SCALE
Unit
METRIC
US
IMPERIAL
Climate System, page 114.
Next Service: xx%.
INTERMEDIATE
MAIN
Time for Service.
INTERMEDIATE
MAIN
MAIN & INTERMED
Reset Service Ind?
YES NO
93_U S_M 07.book Page 95 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
96 Instruments and controls
Explanation of the various selections under
Settings.
Resetting the service indication
Reset the service indication in accordance
with the following:
1 Turn the remote control to the ON posi-
tion, the engine must be switched off.
2 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
3 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
4 Select Time for Service.
5 Press the SET button.
6 To the question Reset Service Ind?
select YES (Press CLR button to undo).
Clock
Adjustments can be made in the Infotain-
ment system.
See separate Manual.
Rain Sensor
The sensitivity has three levels.
Park Assistance
The Park Assistance can be shut off by
choosing OFF.
Alarm Clock
Setting of alarm clock is possible.
Language
Select the desired language. The
number of languages can vary
between markets.
Speed Scale Illum.
Select the proportion of the speedo-
meter to be illuminated in NIGHT-
PANEL mode.
Speed Scale Sel.
Select if both scales or just mph-scale
shall be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL
mode.
Unit
Select the desired group of units.
Next Service: xx%
Displayed percentage is approximately
equivalent to the condition of the
engine oil. 100% is equivalent to new
engine oil. The type of service that is
required is also shown here.
Time for Service.
:When it is time for service the required
service type is displayed.
INTERMEDIATE
MAIN
MAIN & INTERMED
A service indication must only be
reset after the service has been
performed.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 96 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
97Instruments and controls
Switches
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
High beam can not be activated in this posi-
tion but headlight flasher can.
The parking lights can be turned on irre-
spective of the position of the ignition
switch. If the parking lights are on and the
driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn
them off will sound.
Do not use the parking lights alone while
driving.
The parking lights may be used in combina-
tion with the front fog lights (see page 99).
Low beam headlights are turned on when
the ignition switch is turned to ON and
turned off when the switch is turned back to
LOCK.
Headlight levelling 3
Cars with xenon headlights are equipped
with an automatic headlight levelling sys-
tem, which self-calibrates each time the
vehicle is started.
If a fault arises in the automatic headlight
levelling system, the headlights will be
angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in
oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accord-
ingly as the range of the headlights will be
reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay
fuse box (see page 239).
A fault in the system will produce the follow-
ing message on the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID):
Special equipment is required for adjusting
the basic headlight alignment.
Daytime Running Lights
Parking lights
Headlights
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Light switches
93_U S_M 07.book Page 97 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
98 Instruments and controls
High/low beam
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk all the way towards the
steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be
ON.)
The symbol on the main instrument
panel shows when the high beam is on.
Headlight flasher
To flash your headlights, pull the control
stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
The high beam will remain on until you
release the stalk.
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
A delay function allows the low beam head-
lights and back-up lights to remain on for
about 30 seconds after the driver’s door has
been closed.
To activate this function:
1 After turning off the engine, remove the
remote control.
2 Open the driver’s door.
3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
the steering wheel.
The low beam headlights and reversing
lights will come on and remain on for
30 seconds when the door is closed.
Instrument lighting
The brightness of the instrument lighting
can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
- signs on the button above the NIGHT-
PANEL button).
Dipswitch
1 Headlight flasher
2 High/low beam
Adjusting instrument illumination
93_U S_M 07.book Page 98 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
99Instruments and controls
Front fog lights 3
The front fog lights should be used in poor
visibility.
These are automatically turned off when the
engine is switched off. When the car is next
started, the fog lights will have to be
switched back on manually by pressing the
fog light switch. If the engine is restarted
within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will
remain on.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of front fog
lights.
Rear fog light
To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
fog light button on the instrument panel. The
headlights or front fog lights must be on.
The rear fog light is automatically turned off
when the engine is switched off. When the
car is next started, the rear fog light will have
to be switched back on manually by press-
ing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is
restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog
light will remain on.
Rear fog light consists of one bulb.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of rear fog light.
Front fog light switch Rear fog light switch
93_U S_M 07.book Page 99 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
100 Instruments and controls
Turn signal & lane change
indicators
The stalk switch has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
indicating a right or left turn, that are can-
celled automatically when the steering
wheel is centered.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
breaks.
Hazard warning lights
The button for the hazard warning lights is
located on the climate control panel.
When the button is pressed, all the direction
indicators and the symbol in the button flash
simultaneously.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if, because of an accident or breakdown, the
car constitutes a hazard to other road users.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
they should be set up along the side of the
road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
behind your vehicle. If the car is not
clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
further back.
Turn signal & lane change indicators
1 Right
2 Left
Hazard warning light switch
93_U S_M 07.book Page 100 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
101Instruments and controls
Back-Up
The back-up lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
Button for accessory 3
This button can be used for accessories,
such as extra lights.
Priority of audible information
If two or more functions are active simulta-
neously, the most important function at that
time will be prioritized.
If, for example, the direction indicators are
active when you engage reverse, the park-
ing assistance (if fitted) will be heard instead
of the direction indicators. When reverse is
disengaged, the direction indicators will be
heard, if they are still active.
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers
Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
In position 2 you can set the delay period for
intermittent wiping using the thumbwheel on
the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
15 seconds.
The wipers always return to their home posi-
tion when the ignition is turned off.
To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
the windshield, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off the engine and remove the
remote control.
2 Activate the wipers within the next
16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch
down.
When the ignition is next switched on the
wipers will return to their home position.
Changing wipers blades, see page 217.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 101 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
102 Instruments and controls
Washers
Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel.
When the washers are operated, the wipers
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
how long the washers were kept on. If
the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
to prioritize the windshield. The following
message is displayed on the SID:
Headlight washers 3
The headlights are washed at the same time
as the windshield if the headlights are on.
The headlights are washed every fifth time
the windshield washers are used or if two
(2) minutes have elapsed since the wind-
shield was last washed.
The headlight washers are not activated at
speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Windshield wipers
0OFF
1 Single sweep
2 Intermittent wiping
3 Low speed
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing 3
Control for setting wiper delay
93_U S_M 07.book Page 102 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
103Instruments and controls
Rain sensor 3
When the rain sensor is activated the follow-
ing symbol is displayed in SID .
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
The system varies the frequency of wiping
between single sweeps and continuous
wiping, depending on the amount of pre-
cipitation.
Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
make one sweep for reference to see how
much water is on the windshield. In the
future, the sensor compares the amount of
water on the windshield with this reference
value.
If the stalk switch is left in the AUTO position
when the engine is switched off, when the
engine is next started it must first be moved
to the 0 or 3 position and then back to AUTO
to reactivate the sensor.
If the system malfunctions, the wipers will
operate at low speed when the stalk switch
is set to the AUTO position.
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ON to avoid personal injury when clearing
snow and ice from the windshield.
NOTICE
Turn the rain sensor off before washing
the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
damaging the windshield wipers.
Windshield wipers with rain sensor
0OFF
1 Single sweep
2 AUTO - rain sensor engaged
3 Low speed
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing 3
93_U S_M 07.book Page 103 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
104 Instruments and controls
Adjusting sensitivity
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted under Settings. If you increase the
sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep
for reference.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Rain Sensor.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select the sensitivity.
6 Confirm this selection by pressing the
SET button.
Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected
by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
somewhat more sensitive at night. This
adjustment is automatic.
Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
Rain Sensor
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
HIGH
The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
The wipers start when there is only
a small amount of water on
the windshield.
MEDIUM
The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
This is one of the Default Settings.
LOW
The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wip-
ers operate only with a large amount of
water on the windshield, i.e., down-
pour).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 104 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
105Instruments and controls
Rear window wiper, SportCombi
To obtain:
a single sweep: move the control to
position 2, the control springs back to the
home position.
intermittent wiping, 6 s: move the control
to position 2.
If the windshield wipers are activated then
the rear window wiper will automatically
changeover to intermittent wiping when
reverse gear is engaged and the engine
is running.
washing and wiping: move the control to
position 3.
The control returns to the home position.
The wiper makes 3 sweeps after the
washing has finished. If the speed of the
car is below 40 km/h when the washing
has finished the wiper makes an extra
sweep after 5 s to wipe off any washer
fluid residue.
The washer jet is not adjustable.
Changing wiper blade, see page 217.
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 litre, the rear window washer is deacti-
vated. This is in order to prioritise the wind-
shield. The following message is displayed
on the SID:
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Rear window wiper, SportCombi
1OFF
2 Intermittent wiping
3 Washing and wiping
93_U S_M 07.book Page 105 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
106 Instruments and controls
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
passes through an effective filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in the parcel shelf. It is then led
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The Automatic Climate-Control system
(ACC) automatically maintains the desired
cabin temperature, regardless of the
weather outside.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way.
Note that heating or cooling is not
speeded up by setting the temperature
higher or lower than the final tempera-
ture you desire.
To optimize the performance of the air con-
ditioning system, all windows and the
moonroof 3 should be shut. The air vents in
the fascia must be open.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
The filter is a combined particle and char-
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of
noxious substances such as benzene and
toluene are also reduced.
To reduce potential misting on the insides of
the windows, the glass should be cleaned
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more
frequently.
ACC panel
1 Temperature setting: left-hand side
2 Manual setting of air distribution
3 Recirculation
4 AUTO (automatic regulation)
5A/C
6 Defroster
7 Rear window heating
8 Temperature setting: right-hand side
9 Seat heating, front right seat
10 Manual increase of fan speed
11 Hazard warning lights
12 Manual decrease of fan speed
13 Seat heating, front left seat
93_U S_M 07.book Page 106 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
107Instruments and controls
The system uses seven sensors:
Outside air temperature sensor
Cabin air temperature sensor (by the inte-
rior rearveiw mirror)
Sun sensor (on the facia)
Blended air temperature sensors 2
(located in the front floor vents).
Blended air temperature sensors 2
(located in the outer panel vents).
Note:
If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
system will not be able to regulate the cabin
climate as intended.
Sun- and cabin sensor, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
Sun- and cabin sensor, Convertible
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
93_U S_M 07.book Page 107 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
108 Instruments and controls
Air vents
The air vents swivel universally, so that air
can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
shutting the vent in question.
Certain variants have an air vent on the rear
of the floor console.
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
1 Drivers zone.
2 Passenger zone.
The temperature in the rear seat will be a
mixture of the two zones.
The cabin temperature can be set to
between 61–79°F (16–26°C).
The selected temperature is not the actual
air temperature but corresponds to the com-
fort level normally experienced at that tem-
perature after allowance has been made for
the airflow, relative humidity, solar radiation,
and so on, currently prevailing inside the
car.
The most usual temperature setting is
between 64–75°F (18–24°C), depending
on personal preference and what clothing
is worn.
Change the temperature setting in 2°F
(1°C) steps.
Make sure the air vents are open when cool-
ing the cabin in warm weather.
When the ignition is switched off, only the
temperature control affects the system the
next time the engine is started. The system
will warm up/cool down to the temperature
to which the control is set.
Panel vent
93_U S_M 07.book Page 108 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
109Instruments and controls
MAX heat (red indicator):
MAX heating is obtained when the tempera-
ture knob is turned to the first position past
26 (to the red LED).
The driver’s side selection controls air dist-
ribution and the recirculation status. The
temperature can be adjusted on the pas-
senger side.
MAX heating produces:
Maximum heat.
Air distribution to windscreen and floor.
Recirculation OFF.
High fan speed.
MAX cooling (blue indicator):
MAX cooling is obtained when the tempera-
ture knob is turned to the first position past
16 (to the blue LED).
The driver’s side selection controls air dist-
ribution and the recirculation status. The
temperature can be adjusted on the pas-
senger side.
MAX cooling produces:
Max. cooling effect (A/C compressor will
run even if AC OFF has been selected).
Air distribution through panel vents.
Maximum fan speed.
Recirculation ON.
Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 109 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
110Instruments and controls
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recir-
culation will be controlled automatically.
Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual
air distribution selections.
When the engine is started, the ACC system will be in
AUTO mode.
The A/C-compressor is turned off.
The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified. Tem-
perature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation
will be controlled automatically.
Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights
up.
ACC-system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C-compressor OFF.
Air distribution selections locked in current settings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Heating 3 of the front seats is deactivated.
Pressing AUTO-button will put the system into auto-
matic mode.
Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one
click causes the system to resume any manual selec-
tions.
The rear window and door mirror heating is controlled
manually.
Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is
clear of ice and misting to avoid imposing a heavy
load on the battery longer than necessary. Note, how-
ever, that heating will deactivate automatically after a
set time.
Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.
If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C-compressor will be
disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button
will illuminate.
Recirculation is controlled manually to optimise cool-
ing although it can also be switched on and off man-
ually.
Recirculation does not appreciably change the air
quality but it can be useful to switch it on to prevent
unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 110 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
111 Instruments and controls
Air distribution
One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,
all the windows (except the rear side windows, where
the air flow is off) are demisted by:
High fan speed.
The air is directed to the defroster vents.
Temperature increases somewhat.
•Recirculation OFF.
Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.
The defroster function remains engaged until another
selection is made. Heating of the rear window/door
mirrors will, however, deactivate after a set time
period.
Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen wit-
hout the fan speed being increase or the rear window
heating being switched on.
To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO but-
ton.
Defroster and floor vents
Floor vents
Floor and panel vents
93_U S_M 07.book Page 111 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
112Instruments and controls
Start in cold weather:
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
Start in warm weather:
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will activate the A/C compressor (unless the
AC OFF switch has been pressed).
If the ambient air temperature is over 77°F (25°C), the recirculation
cuts in after 0-15 seconds, if this is required in order to reach the
desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.
Panel
Defroster, panel and floor
93_U S_M 07.book Page 112 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
113Instruments and controls
Formation of ice and mist in
extreme weather conditions
It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes. The fol-
lowing measures are recommended if such
problems should occur:
1 Select AUTO and set the temperature to
70°F (21°C)
2 Push one time on the defroster button. If
this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not
enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
The seat cushions and backrests of the front
seats are heated.
Heating is thermostatically controlled.
The heating has two effect steps.
We do not recommend prolonged use of the
higher level for people with sensitive skin.
Heating is controlled manually but can also
be automatic. Refer to Settings on
page 114.
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
every 40:th time the car is started after
having been switched off for more than
2 hours or if the battery has been discon-
nected.
Programming
A number of functions can be customized
under Settings (see page 114).
Tips
(before contacting a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer)
If you feel that the ACC system is not func-
tioning satisfactorily, select "Default
Settings" under Settings (see page 114.
Electric heating, front
seats 3
93_U S_M 07.book Page 113 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
114 Instruments and controls
ACC- Convertible
When the soft top is folded, several func-
tions in the ACC-system is effected.
The system adjusts itself as follows:
xxAUTO goes out.
Heating, air distribution and fan speed are
not affected.
Recirculation and rear window heating
are cut out.
The A/C compressor is switched off (man-
ual activation is possible by pressing the
AC button).
All manual selections are possible with the
exception of rear window heating and
defroster function.
When the soft top is raised, the system
reverts to the AUTO mode and the set tem-
perature.
Note: When the soft top or all the windows
are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the
air conditioning on manually can cause con-
densation to form on cold surfaces, such as
the air ducts.
Settings
Some of the functions of the ACC system
can be customized.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Climate System.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select the Rear Defroster, Heated
Seats, Fan Settings, A/C Mode or
Default Settings.
6 Press the SET button.
7 Make your selection.
8 Confirm your selection by pressing the
SET button.
Settings
Climate System
Rear Defroster
AUTO
MANUAL
Heated Seats
AUTO
MANUAL
Fan Settings
HIGH SPEED
MEDIUM SPEED
LOW SPEED
A/C Mode
AUTO
OFF
Default Settings
Are you sure?
YES NO
93_U S_M 07.book Page 114 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
115Instruments and controls
Explanation of how the ACC system can be
customized under Settings.
Rear Defroster
AUTO:
The rear window and door mirror
heating is controlled automatically.
This is one of the Default Settings.
MANUAL:
The rear window and door mirror
heating is switched on with
the button on ACC panel.
Convertible: The rear window heating
cannot be turned on when the soft top is
folded.
Heated Seats
AUTO:
The front seat heating is controlled
automatically.
Select the level by repeatedly
pressing the appropriate button on
the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
= standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
= low. The selected heating setting
is saved when the engine is
switched off. Note: The symbol on
the ACC panel goes out if the heat-
ing is turned off automatically by the
system.
MANUAL:
See Electric heating, front seats 3
on page 113
.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Fan Settings
HIGH SPEED:
This selection give a slightly higher
fan speed than MEDIUM SPEED
though with continued automatic
regulation.
MEDIUM SPEED:
Normal automatic fan speed. This is
one of the Default Settings.
LOW SPEED:
This selection give a slightly lower
fan speed than MEDIUM SPEED
though with continued automatic
regulation.
Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated
automatically when the soft top is open.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 115 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
116 Instruments and controls
A/C Mode
Auto:
Automatic engagement and disen-
gagement of the A/C. This is one of
the Default Settings.
A/C off:
A/C compressor OFF (see also
page 110). The A/C compressor
can be activated temporarily by
pressing the AC or AUTO button
while on the road and if the outside
temperature is above 41°F (+5°C).
The A/C will be off the next time the
engine is started, if the engine has
been switched off for more than
2hours.
Convertible: The A/C compressor is
switched off when the soft top is folded
down.
Further customizations to this function can
be made at a workshop. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
The A/C compressor can be on even
when the soft top is folded down.
The A/C compressor can be set to
operate as when the soft top was last
folded down.
Dual/Single Zone
Dual zone:
Individual temperature setting for
each zone (see page 108). The sys-
tem saves the settings when the
engine is switched off. This is one of
the Default Settings.
Single zone:
Common temperature setting when
the engine is started. If the temper-
ature setting for the passenger zone
is changed, the system will switch to
Dual zone control. Single zone con-
trol will return the next time the
engine is started having been
switched off for more than 2 hours.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 116 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
117Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment __________ 118
Electric windows_______ 119
Rearview mirrors_______ 122
Moonroof 3 ___________ 128
Interior lighting ________ 131
Cup holder 3 __________ 132
Power Outlet 3 ________ 134
Storage compartments__ 134
Trunk ________________ 136
Interior equipment
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 117 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
118 Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment
The height and reach of the steering wheel
can be adjusted.
There is a release lever under the steering
column.
1 Pull down the lever to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.
3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
lock the steering wheel in position.
When returning the release lever to its
locked position, you may need to adjust the
position of the steering wheel slightly to
allow the lock mechanism to engage cor-
rectly.
Steering wheel lock, see page 152.
Horn signal
Activate the horn by pressing one of the
three areas shown above on the steering
wheel pad.
WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel while the
car is stationary so that you are not
distracted from the traffic.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment
93_U S_M 07.book Page 118 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
119Interior equipment
Electric windows
The electric windows are operated by
means of switches in the door armrests.
For the electric windows to work, the remote
control must be in the ON position in the
ignition switch.
At the end of a journey and having removed
the remote control, you can still operate the
windows, so long as neither of the front
doors has been opened.
Windows having the automatic closing func-
tion (option) can be operated as long as the
car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has
passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch.
To open
Press down the front edge of the button one
step.
The window will stop when it is fully open or
when the button is released.
Automatic opening: Press the button all
the way down and release it.
Comfort opening 3
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the moonroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and
optional moonroof start to open (approx.
2s).
During comfort opening of the windows,
moonroof 3 and soft top (Convertible), the
range is reduced by approximately half.
Convertible: For the remote opening 3 of
the soft top, refer to page 64.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric windows, for exam-
ple, due to children playing.
The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
Window switches Window switch in rear door
93_U S_M 07.book Page 119 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
120 Interior equipment
To close
Raise the front edge of the button one step.
The window will stop when it is fully closed
or when the button is released.
Automatic closing 3: Raise the button all
the way and release it. If the window does
not close automatically, refer to Calibration
on page 121.
Pinch protection 3
On certain model variants, the front electric
windows are equipped with pinch protec-
tion. This is activated if something gets
trapped between the window pane and door
frame when the window is closed. The
window will stop and lower slightly.
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
tion
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in (the
window cannot be closed), the pinch protec-
tion can be temporarily disengaged and the
window closed.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Press and hold the button on the
driver’s door while operating the window
in question.
3 Close the window in question.
The pinch protection will be active the next
time a window is operated.
WARNING
Take care when closing a window to
ensure that no one gets caught.
WARNING
Make sure nothing obstructs the window
when it is closed without pinch protection.
Button for temporary deactivation of rear
door window switches and temporary
override of window pinch protection
93_U S_M 07.book Page 120 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
121Interior equipment
Calibration
The front electric windows should be cali-
brated if automatic closing does not work or
if the battery has been disconnected. The
pinch protection 3 will not work if the win-
dows are not calibrated.
Calibration is performed as follows:
1 Close the doors.
2 The car must be running at idling speed.
The battery charger must not be
connected to the car’s battery during
calibration.
3 Open the window fully, the button must
be kept depressed the whole time.
4 Close the window fully, the button must
be kept raised the whole time and for
approx. 1 second after the window has
closed.
5 Open the window fully, the button must
be kept depressed the whole time and
for approx. 1 second after the window
has fully opened.
6 Close the window fully, and keep the
button raised until the calibration is
confirmed with a "chime".
Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which
require calibration.
Deactivating the rear window
switches
The in the driver’s door deactivates the
window switches in the rear doors.
The illuminated switch will change color
from green to orange (deactivated).
WARNING
The pinch protection will not be engaged
after a power break until the electric
windows have been calibrated.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 121 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
122 Interior equipment
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
To adjust
The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
and heated. The controls for adjusting the
mirrors are on the driver’s door:
1 Select a door mirror with the upper
button.
2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
The mirror heating is turned on together with
the rear window heating.
If the car has an electrically adjustable
driver’s seat with memory, the mirror
settings are stored in the memory (see
page 20).
Manual retraction
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. The mirrors can also be
retracted manually. This can be useful when
parking in tight spaces, such as on the car
deck of a ferry. Remember to return the door
mirrors to their normal positions before
driving off.
Reversing position 3
On certain model variants, the passenger-
side mirror glass can be angled down to
facilitate reversing. Press the button
shown in the illustration. This is located
under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
normal position by pressing the button
again. The mirror will also return to its
normal position if you drive forward approx-
imately 22 yds. (20 meters).
1 Selection of mirror
2 Touch pad for adjustment
3 Reversing position 3
Retracting a door mirror
93_U S_M 07.book Page 122 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
123Interior equipment
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is of the auto-
dimming type and can be deflected with the
lever on its underside. Certain variants have
an autodimming rearview mirror.
The lever should be in the normal position
when you adjust the mirror.
Interior rearview mirror with
autodimming 3
The system is activated when the forward-
facing sensor detects that it is dark outside
and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
is then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirror returns to its normal state when
the strong light source diminishes.
The autodimming function can be turned
OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the
rear-view mirror.
Note!
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
shaded by the trailer.
Mirror position lever
1 Normal position
2 Antidazzle position
Mirror with autodimming
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 Autodimming ON/OFF
3 Rear-facing sensor
93_U S_M 07.book Page 123 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
124 Interior equipment
Interior rearview mirror with
garage opener, autodimming
function and compass 3
Retain your original garage door opener
(transmitter) for future programming proce-
dures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed garage opener buttons be
erased for security purposes, see
page 126.
Preparations for first-time programming
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage
opener is now in the train (or learning) mode
and can be programmed at any time begin-
ning with "Programming" - step 2.
Programming
The garage opener can record and store the
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
to train additional devices to a second or
third button. Begin with "Programming" -
step three.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
(buttons one and three) - releasing only
when the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and
do not repeat step two to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmit-
ter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away
WARNING
Make sure that people and objects are out
of the way of moving door or gate to
prevent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
1–3 Garage opener
4LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
93_U S_M 07.book Page 124 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
126 Interior equipment
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to the garage opener
using a button previously trained, follow
these steps:
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
NOT release the button.
2 The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, proceed with "Programming" -
step 3.
Erasing the three buttons
To erase programming from the three but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
garage opener is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with "Program-
ming" - step 3.
Opening a garage door
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed button. Activation will now
occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
Autodimming
Press button 5 briefly to switch autodimming
on or off. When autodimming is switched on,
a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass win-
dow. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
switched off. See page 123 for a description
of operation.
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while
programming using the "cycling" method
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
1–3 Garage opener
4LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
93_U S_M 07.book Page 126 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
127Interior equipment
Compass
The compass is built into the rearview mir-
ror. The compass bearing is displayed in the
top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illus-
tration on page 126.
Changing zones
The earth’s magnetic field varies depending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
the compass setting will need to be changed
to ensure a correct bearing.
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
The zone number is now also shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now
display the bearing.
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel.
If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
needed perform as follows:
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 s).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Compass zones in USA Compass zones in Canada
93_U S_M 07.book Page 127 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
128 Interior equipment
Moonroof 3
The moonroof is operated by the control in
the roof console. For the moonroof to work,
the remote control must be in the ON posi-
tion in the ignition switch.
If the car is equipped with windows having
the automatic closing function, the moon-
roof can be opened and closed so long as
the car is unlocked until 20 minutes has
passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch.
To open
Manually controlled opening
Slide the control rearward to its first position.
The moonroof will halt when you release the
control. If you do not release the control, the
moonroof will open to the comfort position.
To open the moonroof further, release the
control and then once again press it rear-
ward.
Automatic opening
Slide the control rearward to the second
position and release it. The moonroof will
open to the comfort position. To open the
moonroof further, slide the control rearward
a second time.
Moonroof without automatic opening
Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see
illustration). The moonroof will stop when
you release the control or once it is fully
open.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the electric moonroof. Risk of serious
or fatal injuries!
Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric moonroof, for exam-
ple, due to children playing.
The person operating the electric
moonroof is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
opening, before closing the moonroof.
Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
Moonroof control
1 Manually controlled opening
2 Automatic opening
3 Manually controlled closing
4 Automatic closing
5 Ventilation position
93_U S_M 07.book Page 128 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
129Interior equipment
To close
Manually controlled closing
Slide the control forward to its first position.
The moonroof will halt when you release the
control.
Automatic closing 3
Slide the control forward to its second posi-
tion and release it. The moonroof will close
fully.
The moonroof pinch protection halts closing
and opens the moonroof slightly if some-
thing obstructs closing.
Moonroof without automatic closing 3
Slide the control forward to position 3 (see
illustration). The moonroof will stop when
you release the control or once it is fully
closed.
Ventilation position (rear edge of moon-
roof open)
To open – press in the control.
To close – slide the control forward to the
second position.
It is also possible to select the ventilation
position when the moonroof is open by
pressing in the control. The moonroof will
then close automatically. Press the control
once more to open the moonroof to its ven-
tilation position.
If you wish to open the moonroof fully from
the ventilation position, you must first close
it (slide the control forward). You can then
slide the control rearward to open the moon-
roof.
The moonroof incorporates an interior,
manual, sliding sun blind.
Moonroof without automatic closing 3
To open – press the control up.
To close – slide the control forward to
position 3.
Comfort opening 3
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the moonroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and
optional moonroof start to open (approx.
2s).
During comfort opening of the windows,
moonroof (option) and soft top, the range is
reduced by approximately half.
If the moonroof is in the ventilation position,
it will not open.
Convertible: For the remote opening of the
soft top, refer to page 64.
WARNING
Exercise great care when closing the
moonroof to ensure that nothing gets
trapped.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 129 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
130 Interior equipment
Pinch protection 3
The moonroof is equipped with pinch pro-
tection. This is activated if something gets
trapped when the moonroof is being closed.
The moonroof will stop and open slightly.
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
tion
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in
(moonroof cannot be closed), the pinch pro-
tection can be temporarily disengaged.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Press and hold the button on the
driver’s door while operating the window
in question.
3 Close the moonroof with the button on
the roof console.
The pinch protection will be operative the
next time the moonroof is operated.
Emergency operation of the
moonroof
In an emergency, such as if there is an elec-
trical failure, the moonroof can be operated
with a screwdriver.
Remove the lens from the roof console. Use
a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
screwdriver.
Turn clockwise to close the moonroof when
in ventilation position.
Turn counter-clockwise to close when in
open position.
WARNING
Make sure nothing obstructs the moon-
roof when it is closed without pinch
protection.
Button for overriding the moonroof pinch
protection
93_U S_M 07.book Page 130 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
131Interior equipment
Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of one front and
one rear roof light, floor lighting, and cour-
tesy lights in the doors (certain variants
only). The light switch for the interior lighting
is located on the roof console by the rear-
view mirror.
When the switch is in the mid-position (door-
activated), the interior lighting will come on:
When the car is unlocked.
When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
The lighting goes out:
When the car is locked.
When the ignition is turned on.
Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open and the light switch is in
position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the
interior lighting will be switched off automat-
ically after 20 minutes to save the battery.
The glove box lighting is switched on and off
automatically when the glove box is opened
and closed.
1 Interior lighting always off
2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors
3 Interior lighting on continuously
Rear lighting
1 Reading lights
2 Roof light
93_U S_M 07.book Page 131 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
132 Interior equipment
Sun visor
Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on
the sun visors. The lighting comes on when
the cover is raised.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting is switched on and off
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
Cup holder 3
Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in
the center console compartment between
the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport
Sedan and SportCombi). The cup holder
between the seats can be raised if you wish
to use the compartment for storage.
WARNING
The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china or glass as
these can cause personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
or aluminium cans.
Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
NOTICE
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system , the ignition switch or the
like when using the cup holders. Soft
drinks in particular can cause malfunc-
tions.
Sun visor with vanity mirror
93_U S_M 07.book Page 132 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
133Interior equipment
Cup holder in fascia Cup holder in center console compart-
ment between front seats
3
Cup holder in rear seat cushion
3
, Sport
Sedan and SportCombi
93_U S_M 07.book Page 133 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
134 Interior equipment
Power Outlet 3
You can use the electrical socket in the stor-
age compartment under the armrest
between the front seats to charge a mobile
phone, for example. There is a recess on
each side of the compartment which will
accept a lead so that you can close the lid
without damaging the charger lead.
Storage compartments
There are additional storage compartments
below the front ashtray and in the doors.
WARNING
The maximum output of the cigarette
lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating
of the socket in the compartment between
the seats is the same. Overloading can
result in melting or even fire.
WARNING
The glove box must be closed while trav-
elling. An open glove box door could
cause personal injury in the event of a
crash.
Open the glove box with the button on the
left of the moulding.
Convertible has lockable glove box. Use
the traditionally key, see page 54.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 134 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
135Interior equipment
Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold
air
3
.
This allows the storage of chocolate dur-
ing hot weather for example.
Storage compartment between front seats
Storage pocket on front edge of seats
3
Storage pocket on back of seats
3
Card holder
93_U S_M 07.book Page 135 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
136 Interior equipment
Trunk
Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan
Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.
WARNING
Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash. See also page 194.
When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since other-
wise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
during heavy breaking or a crash.
Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 136 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
137Interior equipment
For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
the wide part can be folded down separately.
Next to the hinges in the trunk are handles for unlocking the rear seat
backrests.
The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
trunk.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does
not get caught.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the SID (equivalent message displayed
for right-hand backrest):
Trunk Release Handle, see page 139.
Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, Sport Sedan, see
page 140.
Rear left seat
backrest unlocked.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 137 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
138 Interior equipment
Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
There is a lock on the rear side of the hatch. Use this to lock or unlock
the hatch.
To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
hatch is now locked.
To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.
WARNING
Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 280).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 138 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
139Interior equipment
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan
There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and
as low down as possible in the trunk.
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
WARNING
Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
smaller and lighter bags on top.
Secure heavy and bulky items using
the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.
This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake
suddenly or be involved in a crash.
Secure small items if the backrest is
folded down. Small items can also be
thrown around inside the car and
cause personal injury.
The elastic cargo net 3 is only
designed for light objects that are to be
kept in place while driving
Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid
eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.
ALWAYS keep face and body out of
recoil path. DO NOT use when strap
has visible signs of wear or damage.
The rear seat must be in the upright
position to protect against load
displacement in the event of a crash.
Tie down eyes in the trunkTrunk Release Handle
93_U S_M 07.book Page 139 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
140 Interior equipment
Trunk lighting
On the underside of the parcel shelf is a light
that is switched on and off when the trunk is
opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
Emergency opening of the
narrow backrest, Sport Sedan
The narrow section of the backrest can be
opened in an emergency if the car is without
electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
and you need to access the trunk for a warn-
ing triangle, for example.
Remove the cover and depress the yellow
lever forward.
Tools and spare wheel, see page 254.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the
car, as this will alter its handling char-
acteristics (see page 280).
Match your speed and driving style to
how the car is loaded. The handling
characteristics of the car can be
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
Cover over emergency opening lever, on
parcel shelf
93_U S_M 07.book Page 140 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
141Interior equipment
Folding down the rear seat backrest, SportCombi
For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the
wide part can be folded down separately.
It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are
slid forward.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.
An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that
it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not
be visible. Also make sure that the seatbelt does not get caught.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the SID (equivalent message displayed
for right-hand backrest):
WARNING
Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.
Rear left seat
backrest unlocked.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 141 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
142 Interior equipment
WARNING
Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags on
top.
Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT
overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path.
DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
Secure heavy and bulky items using the lashing eyes provided
in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage flying around
if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items
can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal
injury.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 280).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 142 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
143Interior equipment
Load-through hatch, SportCombi
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
WARNING
Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 280).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 143 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
144 Interior equipment
Tie down eyes, SportCombi
There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and
as low down as possible in the trunk.
Driving with the trunk lid open, see
page 194.
WARNING
Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
Never stack cargo so high that any
part of the cargo lies above the edge
of the backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is
not being used.
Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance manoeu-
vres and in the event of a crash.
Use the lashing eyes and suitable
anchorage straps 3 for optimum
securing of loads.
Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the cargo straps.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 144 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
145Interior equipment
Cargo net 3
If possible, avoid having the rear seat
folded down when driving with a heavy
load, because the anchoring possibili-
ties are restricted when the rear seat
is in this position. That the rear seat
is in the upright is a basic require-
ment for protection against cargo
displacement in the event of a
crash.
Improve safety by fastening the outer
seatbelts. Check that the red "indica-
tor-flag" next to the opening handles is
not visible. If the red "indicator-flag" is
visible the backrest is not locked.
Match your speed and driving style to
how the car is loaded. The handling
characteristics of the car can be
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg)
corresponds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1,000 kg) in a front-end collision at
32 mph (50 km/h).
Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight and the axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 280.
WARNING
Never overload the cargo net 3. If the
elastic breaks this may cause
personal injury. Do not use a cargo net
that shows signs of wear.
Never use the elastic floor net 3 and
elastic side net 3 when the rear seat is
folded down. These nets are only
intended to keep light objects tidy, not
for the anchoring of loads.
Secure the load in the luggage
compartment firmly. Using a cargo net
is not considered as load securing.
The only purpose of a cargo net is to
prevent light objects from being
thrown forward into the cabin during
heavy breaking.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 145 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
146 Interior equipment
Cargo net, vertical 3, SportCombi
Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.
1 Remove the rear cover panels in the
roof.
2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two
rear attachment points in the roof.
3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two
anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.
Tension the straps.
The cargo net can also be fitted behind the
front seats when the whole rear seat is
folded.
1 Remove the front cover panels in the
roof.
2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the
two front attachment points in the roof.
3 Lengthen the straps with the enclosed
extra straps. Secure the hooks in the two
outer eyes furthest back on the front
seats’ rails down by the floor. Tension
the straps.
Storage
When the cargo net is not in use it should be
stored in the bag supplied. Position the bag
on the floor in the luggage compartment,
closest to the backrest and secure it in the
front anchorage eyes using the Velcro fas-
teners.
Attaching the cargo net to the roof Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye
Storing the cargo net
93_U S_M 07.book Page 146 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
147Interior equipment
Cargo net, floor mounted 3, SportCombi
1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of
the floor in the slots in the side pieces.
2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and
secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up
floor.
Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
bands are not twisted
2 Lower anchorage point
Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
with subwoofer
3
1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
bands are not twisted
2 Lower anchorage point
93_U S_M 07.book Page 147 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
148 Interior equipment
Cargo guard 3, SportCombi
To fit
1 Hold the cartridge so that the extendible
part faces backward.
2 Position the cartridge over the pin (1) on
the left and right-hand sides. Press the
cartridge down and rotate it slightly
forward until a click is heard.
3 Check the fitting by pulling the cartridge
up, it should now be fitted firmly.
To remove
1 Retract the cargo guard into the
cartridge.
2 Pull the handle (2) back and lift up the
cartridge. Repeat this on the other side.
Opening the cargo guard
The cargo guard can be opened halfway in
order to facilitate loading objects into the
luggage compartment (and to avoid stretch-
ing in over the luggage compartment to
reach the cargo guard).
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Press the rear lip of the cargo guard
down, e.g. with an elbow. The cargo
guard now opens halfway so that
objects can be more easily loaded into
the luggage compartment.
3 Pull the cargo guard down to the lower
position
NOTICE
Do not place any objects on the extended
cargo guard. It is designed to shield
against view and not for storage.
WARNING
A cassette that is incorrectly fitted can
detach and cause personal injury in the
event of a collision, heavy breaking or
similar.
Fitting the cargo guard
1 Pin on which the cargo guard is fitted
2 Handle for removing the cargo guard
Opening the cargo guard
93_U S_M 07.book Page 148 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
149Starting and driving
Ignition switch ________ 150
Steering wheel lock____ 152
Starting the engine ____ 152
Important considerations
for driving __________ 154
Refueling ____________ 157
Engine Break-in Period_ 161
Manual transmission___ 162
Automatic
transmission 3 ______ 163
Cruise control ________ 169
Braking______________ 170
Traction Control System
(TCS) ______________ 173
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP
®
) 3 ___ 175
Parking brake_________ 177
Parking ______________ 177
Saab Parking
Assistance 3________ 180
Economical driving_____ 183
Driving in cold weather__ 185
Driving in hot climates __ 187
Towing a trailer 3 ______ 188
Driving with a roof rack
load ________________ 192
Driving with a load _____ 194
Driving with the trunk lid
open________________ 194
Driving in deep water ___ 194
Driving at night ________ 195
Towing the car_________ 195
Jump starting _________ 198
For long trips __________ 200
Starting and driving
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 149 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
150 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
The ignition switch is located on the center
console between the front seats. In cars
with automatic transmission, the remote
control can only be removed when the
selector lever is in position P.
To allow the various systems in the car time
to register that the remote control has been
inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn
the remote control for roughly half a second.
LOCK position
The parking lights, hazard warning lights
and interior lighting can be turned on.
Cars with automatic transmission: Move
the gear lever to P.
The gear lever is locked in position. This is
the only position in which the remote control
can be removed.
Cars with manual transmission: The
remote control can be removed regardless
of the position of the gear lever.
NOTICE
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
If snow from clothing falls into the ignition
switch and melts, the ignition switch can
seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing
before getting into the car.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control
before leaving children unattended in
the car.
Apply the parking brake before remov-
ing the remote control.
Never remove the remote control
while the car is moving. This will acti-
vate the steering wheel lock and make
it impossible to steer the car.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 150 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
151Starting and driving
OFF position
Parts of the electrical system are operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the
OFF position with the engine not running
as this could cause the battery to run flat
in a matter of hours.
Cars with automatic transmission: The
gear lever is not locked. See also page 164.
If the remote control is turned from ON to
OFF before the car is stationary then turning
to LOCK may not be possible. In which case
turn the remote control to the ON position
until the ABS lamp goes out, approx. 2 s.
Following which, turn it back to OFF.
ON position
The entire electrical system is operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the ON
position when the engine is not running.
Turn the remote control to the OFF position
to disconnect the electrical system.
When you turn the remote control to ON,
some indicator and warning lights will come
on in the main instrument panel. These
should go out after about 3 seconds.
ST - starter position
The starter motor operates (automatic
transmission: selector lever must be in P or
N) when the remote control is turned to this
position. When released, the remote control
will spring back to the ON position.
The car has an electronic restart lock. If the
engine fails to start, the remote control must
first be turned back to a position between
OFF and LOCK before the starter motor can
be operated again.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 151 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
152 Starting and driving
Steering wheel lock
The steering wheel lock is electronic. The
lock engages when the remote control is
removed from the ignition and unlocks when
the remote control is inserted. A click can be
heard when the steering wheel lock locks
and unlocks.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do
not succeed on first attempt you must
remove the remote control before trying
again. Turn the steering wheel and insert
the remote control into the ignition switch.
If the steering wheel lock does not disen-
gage it will not be possible to turn the remote
control in the ignition switch.
The following message is shown on the SID:
If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel
lock, the following message will be
displayed on the SID:
If the steering wheel lock malfunctions while
the remote control is in the ignition switch,
this may prevent the removal of the remote
control or prevent the car from being
restarted once the engine has been
switched off.
If you have to leave the car, lock the car by
pressing down the lock buttons on the
doors. Lock the front left door from outside
with the traditional key (see page 50). The
car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.
Starting the engine
Pull out key, turn
steering wheel. Restart.
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
WARNING
When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
- Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If
the gear lever is not in the neutral posi-
tion, the clutch pedal must be fully
depressed or the car will jump
forwards or backwards, which may
cause a crash.
- Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
down. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
Cars with automatic transmission:
select position P to remove the ignition
key. The key can only be removed in
this gear position.
Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 152 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
153Starting and driving
Starting the engine
Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily
before it has warmed up. Do not drive away
before the warning and indicator lights have
gone out.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
touch the accelerator.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Cars with automatic transmission
The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
Note! Once the engine has started, the
brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly
normal.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Useful tips on starting the engine
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
follows:
1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
essential that you turn the ignition to
ON before depressing the accelerator).
2 Press the accelerator to the floor and run
the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
will prevent the engine being flooded
(fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
fuel supply).
3 Now start the engine in the normal way
- do not touch the accelerator.
If the engine stalls immediately after starting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
do not touch the accelerator when restarting
the engine.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 153 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
154 Starting and driving
Important
considerations for
driving
1 Starting and driving
Do not use full throttle until the engine
is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary
wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge
repeatedly enters the red zone, the
engine may suddenly lose power, due
to the initiation of a monitoring system
that limits the boost pressure. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
Under certain barometric conditions
(high outside temperature and/or high
altitude) the needle may enter the first
part of the red zone without necessarily
indicating that a fault has arisen.
A protective function (interruption of the
fuel supply) limits the engine speed.
2 Stopping the engine
Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off - stop the engine
when it is idling.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
One of the advantages of boost pres-
sure regulation is that the engine can
also be run safely on gasoline with a
lower octane rating, although not lower
than AON 87. However, engine perfor-
mance will fall slightly and heavy load-
ing and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recom-
mended grade of fuel.
The maximum boost pressure is regu-
lated according to the tendency of the
engine to knock. Short-lived knocking
is perfectly normal. This can occur
when the engine is running at about
3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
extent of this knocking will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
Isolated instances of knocking can
occur with low-octane fuel. This
controlled form of knocking, followed
by a reduction in the boost pressure, is
a sign that the control system is work-
ing normally, and is perfectly safe for
the engine.
The light 3 comes on in the event of an
engine or gearbox fault (cars with automatic
gearbox), which can cause drivability prob-
lems. The car can still be driven but perhaps
with limited performance.
Contact a workshop when you find it suit-
ably. We recommend that you contact an
authorised Saab workshop.
NOTICE
If the engine sounds strange there is a
malfunction. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer immediately.
The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
Limited performance.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 154 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
155Starting and driving
Limp-home
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that checks a number of
internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
throttle valve, the engine management
system will set the throttle system to the
limp-home mode. This means:
idling control will be poor (uneven idling
since regulated by ignition and fuel
supply)
engine performance will be reduced
the cruise control will not function
the capacity of the A/C compressor will be
limited.
If the diagnosis function detects a fault in the
engine management system, the light
"Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in
the instrument panel will come on (see
page 83). Have the car checked at a work-
shop as soon as possible. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
Important considerations with
catalytic converters
The catalytic converter is an emission con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious
metal alloy).
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinues to function properly, and also to avoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
NOTICE
If "Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash
(indicating that the engine is misfiring and
the catalytic converter can be damaged),
ease off the accelerator slightly. The light
should go out or start to shine constantly.
If the light continues to flash despite
easing off the accelerator, you may
continue to drive the car but at the mini-
mum throttle permitted by the current traf-
fic situation. Have the car checked as
soon as possible. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 155 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
156 Starting and driving
Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program.
Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to a workshop. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
If the engine fails to start (in severe cold
or if the battery is flat), the car can be
bump started (manual transmission only)
or started using jump leads to a donor
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
switch off the engine to avoid serious
damage to the catalytic converter. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer for advice.
Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot and could there-
fore start a fire.
Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
If you bump start the car when the engine
is already at normal working temperature,
the engine must start to run on all cylin-
ders. Abort bump starting if the engine
fails to start immediately.
Failure to strictly follow these instructions
can result in damage to the catalytic con-
verter and associated components, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
NOTICE
If the car runs out of gas, air may be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
adequate cooling, air must be blown into
the engine compartment and under the
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
effect that would obtain at the corre-
sponding road speed.
Engine management system with catalytic
converter
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor
3 Catalytic converter
93_U S_M 07.book Page 156 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
157Starting and driving
Refueling
WARNING
If you spill fuel and then something ignites
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. This spray can happen if your
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
Therefore:
never smoke while refueling.
never use gasoline for any purpose
other than as engine fuel.
gasoline is extremely flammable and
can cause severe burns. No open or
exposed flames near gasoline.
do not use a mobile phone at the
same time as refueling.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-
ing the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
NOTICE
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as room for
expansion is needed for when the
temperature rises.
The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
The engine control module (ECM) moni-
toring the engine parameters also stores
fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
, thus indicating a fault that must be
checked by your Saab dealer, see
page 83.
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol illu-
minates when less than approximately
2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains
in the tank.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 157 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
158 Starting and driving
Refueling
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Open the filler cap, located in the right-
hand rear fender.
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe and let the first
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring-
coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while filling is in progress.
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
stops, and wait a few seconds after
you´ve finished pumping before you
remove the nozzle.
Filler cap
To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a
spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,
it will spring back to the right.
When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank full.
Refer to page 185 for information regarding
gasoline anti-freeze.
WARNING
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-
ing the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
NOTICE
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
up the filler pipe as expansion room is
needed when the temperature rises.
Fill to maximum filling capacity.
Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
Filler cap
93_U S_M 07.book Page 158 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
159Starting and driving
The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
ring on the cap into the slot.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
to get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly.
Filling a portable fuel container Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-
tant part of the proper maintenance of your
vehicle.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends:
Gasoline engines – AON 90.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane
is less than 87, you may get a heavy knock-
ing noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine. A little pinging noise
when you accelerate or drive uphill is con-
sidered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knock-
ing, your engine needs service.
WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed or on any surface other than the
ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operat-
ing the nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is complete.
Do not smoke while pumping gaso-
line.
When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
the fuel door
93_U S_M 07.book Page 159 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
160 Starting and driving
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet spec-
ifications which were developed by automo-
bile manufacturers around the world and
contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
which is available from the Alliance of Auto-
mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalli-
ance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meet-
ing these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other
gasoline.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (see the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to
operate on fuels that meet California speci-
fications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE) on page 83. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain
additives that will help prevent engine and
fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
your emission control system to work prop-
erly. You should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency regulations. Saab recom-
mends that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean. If your vehicle experi-
ences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gaso-
lines may be available in your area to con-
tribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they
comply with the specifications described
earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can cor-
rode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be cov-
ered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask
the attendant where you buy gasoline
93_U S_M 07.book Page 160 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
161Starting and driving
whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country out-
side the United States or Canada, the
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recom-
mended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you will
be driving.
Engine Break-in Period
Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
surfaces.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 161 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
162 Starting and driving
Manual transmission
Clutch interlock
To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
depressed.
When changing gear, fully depress the
clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
is inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the gearbox.
Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.
NOTICE
When reverse gear is to be engaged,
the car must be at a standstill with
the accelerator fully released.
Gear positions, 5-speed Gear positions, 6-speed
93_U S_M 07.book Page 162 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
163Starting and driving
Automatic
transmission 3
The automatic transmission has an elec-
tronic control module. The control module
receives information including accelerator
position and road speed. Using this and
other information, it controls the hydraulic
pressure of the transmission to ensure that
gear changing is as smooth as possible.
The remote control can only be removed
when the selector lever is in the P position.
The engine can only be started when the
selector lever is in the P or N position.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be idling when you move the selector lever
from one position to another. If not, the
transmission could be damaged.
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal when shifting
the selector lever from P or N.
The car must be at a standstill before
P, R or N is selected. You have to have
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
NOTICE
After selecting a drive position, pause
briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
ate.
Selector lever
1 Position for manual gear selection
Indication of gear position on main
instrument panel
93_U S_M 07.book Page 163 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
164 Starting and driving
Park Brake Shift Lock
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector lever out of the P or N posi-
tion, the gear selector lever detent (catch)
must be pressed in at the same time as the
brake pedal is held depressed.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed in before the lever can be
moved between certain positions.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock, see page 166.
Adaptive gear change patterns
The adaptive gear change pattern function
adapts gear changing to the prevailing driv-
ing conditions. The transmission control
module senses the engine load, vehicle
speed and temperature of the transmission.
A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sary gear changes and undesired increases
in transmission temperature.
Certain variants use a special change pat-
tern for the first few minutes after a cold start
so that the catalytic converter reaches its
working temperature more quickly.
Thermal transmission protection
The transmission has built-in protection
against overheating. If the temperature of
the transmission fluid exceeds 302°F
(150°C), engine torque will be limited to
147 ft.lbs. (200 Nm).
The following message is shown on the SID:
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
Lock-up
The transmission’s torque converter has a
lock-up function. This can lock the torque
converter, thus reducing the engine speed
and fuel consumption.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
a down change is made to optimize acceler-
ation, e.g. for overtaking.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed,
unless you ease off the accelerator before
reaching this.
Gearbox too hot. Make a
safe stop. Open hood.
Selector lever detent
93_U S_M 07.book Page 164 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
166 Starting and driving
Cars with 5-speed transmission
In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
2nd gear must be selected manually. Select
5th gear manually or move the selector
lever to D, see page 168.
Cars with 6-speed transmission 3
The car may be totally powerless. If this is
case, have the car transported to a work-
shop to have the problem rectified.
The car may feel weak but can be driven
carefully to a workshop to have the prob-
lem rectified.
Drivability may barely be affected.
Irrespective of the drivability of the car, the
car must be taken to a workshop to have the
problem checked and rectified.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage
compartment ahead of the selector
lever.
3 Under the floor of the storage compart-
ment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
hold the plastic lever while moving the
selector lever from P to N.
4 Remove the tool.
5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately, otherwise it
should remain on.
Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
Contact a workshop to have the problem
checked and rectified. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector lever out of
the park position, even if the ignition is
ON. If for some reason the selector lever
has to be moved out of the park position
(i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
described below.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
93_U S_M 07.book Page 166 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
167Starting and driving
Selector lever positions
P
The selector lever is locked and the transmission
is mechanically blocked.
The engine can be started.
To move the selector lever out of the P position,
depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
(catch) on the selector lever.
Only select the park position (P) when the car is
stationary.
R
Only select the reverse position (R) when the car
stationary. The detent release button must be
pressed before the selector lever can be moved
to R.
Wait until reverse gear has engaged before
touching the accelerator.
N
You must press the brake pedal to move
the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
In neutral, the transmission is disengaged from the
engine. The engine can be started but make sure
the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
movement.
To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
the engine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
position (D).
D
The drive position (D) is the normal one for forward
driving. The transmission shifts automatically
between all gears from 1st to 5th or 6th, the timing
of which depends on factors such as the current
accelerator position and the speed of the car.
Pause for a moment before applying the acce-
lerator, to allow the gears to engage.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 167 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
168 Starting and driving
Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steer-
ing wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
position.
Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
gear by pressing the left-hand button.
Sentronic, manual gear selection
Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
(to the left position D) to select gear manually.
Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
the letter M after each gear change.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enable you to remain in a low gear for an extended
period of time.
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to start
off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
When descending steep hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.
When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accel-
erator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
enough to avoid overrevving.
Steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection
3
93_U S_M 07.book Page 168 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
169Starting and driving
Cruise control
(Cruise control system)
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion), the brakes must be applied once
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
The following message is shown on the SID:
The system has the following functions:
1 ON: engaged
2 OFF: disengaged
3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
the set speed
4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
the set speed
5 RESUME: re-engages the system at the
set speed
The CRUISE indicator light in the main
instrument panel comes on when the switch
is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
while the cruise control is ON, the system
will be ON the next time the engine is
started.
To set the desired speed
1 Slide the switch to ON.
2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
SET/– when the car has reached the
desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
h)).
To increase the preset speed
You can increase the speed in any of
the following ways:
Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise
control already engaged).
Hold the control in the SET/+ position until
the desired speed is reached (when
cruise control already engaged).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control system in
wet or icy conditions, in dense traffic or on
winding roads.
Tap brakes lightly
before using cruise ctrl.
Cruise control switches
93_U S_M 07.book Page 169 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
170 Starting and driving
To reduce the preset speed
You can reduce speed in any of the follow-
ing ways:
Brake to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Hold the control in the SET/– position until
the desired speed is reached.
Temporary increase in speed
Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
transmission), to exceed the set speed such
as for overtaking. When you release the
accelerator, the car will return to the set
speed.
To disengage the system
temporarily
Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but
only as far as to disengage the cruise con-
trol. Allow the switch to spring back.
To re-engage the system
Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will
return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).
To disengage the system
The system will be disengaged:
As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed (cars with manual transmis-
sion).
When the switch is slid towards OFF. See
also heading "To disengage the system
temporarily".
When the switch is slid to OFF.
When the TCS/ESP
®
system is opera-
tive.
When position N is selected (cars with
automatic transmission).
Braking
It is good practice to try your brakes period-
ically while driving. This is particularly
important when driving in heavy rain, on
roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly now and again. This
should also be done after the car has been
washed, and in extremely damp weather.
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
such as when negotiating long descents
with a drop of several hundred yards (hun-
dred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
braking effect of the engine. If the car has
automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
gear.
You can help to prolong the life of the brakes
by thinking ahead and braking harder over
short periods, rather than braking more
moderately over long stretches.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 170 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
171Starting and driving
ABS brakes
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modu-
lates the brake pressure to each wheel. The
pressure is automatically reduced just
before the wheel locks up and then
increases again to the point at which the
wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sen-
sors send information to the brake system’s
electronic control module for every 4 or so
inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
information is processed continuously to
ensure that the adjustment of the brake
pressure will be as exact as possible.
Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
second.
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distri-
butes the brake pressure between the front
and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s speed or load.
The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
which will switch on the ABS warning light
if a fault is detected in the system (see
page 82).
The following message will appear on the
SID (and corresponding symbol on main
instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
WARNING
It is prudent to try your brakes from
time to time, especially when driving in
heavy rain, through water collected on
the road, in snow, on a wet road
surface or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, the brakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
the brake discs and pads warm up and
dry.
The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
The brake pressure required when the
engine is off, (e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-
sive.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
WARNING
The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
To stop as quickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
press the brake pedal down hard
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simulta-
neously, and steer the car to safety.
Antilock brake malfunc.
Contact service.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 171 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
172 Starting and driving
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
because the wheels cannot lock up, steer-
ing control is retained.
When the ABS system operates you will feel
the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
cannot press too hard), declutch and if nec-
essary steer to safety.
Do not release the brake pedal before the
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
The above is critical.
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the brake pedal. This means that
the driver can brake gently to test the condi-
tion of the road and adapt their driving
accordingly.
It is well worth practising the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
facility.
Braking with ABS – evasive steeringBraking with ABS brakes.
Indication that the system is operating:
pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise
93_U S_M 07.book Page 172 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
173Starting and driving
Traction Control
System (TCS)
Anti-spin system
How the system works
The Traction Control System (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
The TCS uses information from the ABS
wheel sensors to detect when the front (driv-
ing) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
wheels.
If the two front wheels are rotating faster
than the rear wheels, the torque from the
engine is reduced to eliminate the differ-
ence.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
The advantages of the TCS become most
apparent when the cohesion between the
front wheels and the road surface is so low
that one or both of the wheels would lose
their grip were the car not equipped with the
TCS, e.g.:
When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different
surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
the TCS functions like an electronic differ-
ential lock, making sure that both wheels
rotate at the same speed. The system
also functions when the car is reversing.
When cornering, if the inside front wheel
rotates faster than the other wheels.
TCS OFF
lights up if:
a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
there is a fault in the ABS system
the system has been switched off
manually.
WARNING
When driving normally, the TCS system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The TCS must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 173 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
174 Starting and driving
TCS indicator
When the remote control is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
The light comes on when the TCS is
operative, that is when one of the wheels
has lost its grip.
The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
that the limit for grip has been exceeded and
that the driver must exercise greater care.
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
You can switch the system off manually with
the TCS button , whereupon the
light will come on. The TCS cannot be
switched off if the car is travelling faster than
35 mph (60 km/h).
It may be necessary to switch off the system
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
be switched off automatically.
The following message is shown on the SID:
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
operative.
Traction control failure.
Contact service.
TCS button
93_U S_M 07.book Page 174 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
175Starting and driving
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP
®
) 3
Anti-skid system
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
system that helps the driver to stabilize the
car in unusual circumstances that can oth-
erwise be more difficult to handle.
How the ESP
®
system works
The Electronic Stability Program can help to
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. The car has sensors that measure
wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
steering wheel position and braking pres-
sure. The values provided by these sensors
are used to calculate the actual direction of
the car, the intentions of the driver and
whether the ESP
®
should be engaged.
If this direction does not agree with that
intended by the driver, calculated from the
steering wheel position, the ESP
®
is
engaged.
The ESP
®
improves the driver’s chances
of retaining control over the car in a critical
situation.
WARNING
When driving normally, the ESP
®
system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The ESP
®
must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads
must be adopted.
Illustration of how the system applies the
brakes on one or several wheels in order
to reduce the likelihood of the car skidding
93_U S_M 07.book Page 175 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
176 Starting and driving
ESP
®
OFF
lights up if:
a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
the system has been switched off
manually
ESP
®
indicator light
When the remote control is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
The light comes on for a short period of
time when the ESP
®
system is operative.
Operation of the ESP
®
indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver during continued driving.
Turning ESP
®
system off
The system can be turned off manually with
the ESP
®
button , whereupon the
light will come on. The car must be trav-
elling slower than 35 mph (60 km/h). The
TCS is also disengaged.
The ESP
®
is always engaged during brak-
ing, even if it has been switched off manu-
ally with the ESP
®
button.
If a fault is detected in the system, the
following message will be displayed on
the SID:
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the ESP
®
is
operative.
Stability control failure.
Contact service.
NOTICE
Changes to the chassis, such as a
change of wheels, shock absorbers or
springs, could affect the function of the
ESP
®
system.
Always consult a workshop before chang-
ing any chassis components. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
ESP
®
button
93_U S_M 07.book Page 176 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
177Starting and driving
Parking brake
The parking brake lever is situated between
the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
the indicator light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, pull the release button on the under-
side of the lever and lower the lever.
If conditions allow, it is best if the brake
pedal is not depressed, or only depressed
as little as necessary so as to stop the car
from rolling, when the parking brake is
applied.
To facilitate releasing the parking brake,
depress the brake pedal. This is especially
appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.
If the parking brake is applied when the car
starts off, the following message will appear
on the SID:
Parking
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
you park the car. If the car is to be
left parked for a long time, refer to
page 179.
Always apply the parking brake
before removing the remote control.
Do not use the parking brake while
driving.
Grasp the parking brake lever in such
a way that no fingers get trapped when
you release the parking brake.
Release park brake.
WARNING
Never leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
Do not park on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot and could start
a fire.
Apply the parking brake, remove the
remote control and lock the car.
Correct hold
93_U S_M 07.book Page 177 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
178 Starting and driving
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock.
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
the car.
Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicu-
ous parking space.
Thieves strike whenever and wher-
ever they are given the opportunity.
1 Downhill with curb.
Turn the wheels toward
the curb and edge the car
forwards until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
2 Uphill with curb. Tu r n
the wheels away from the
curb and edge the car
backward until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
3 Uphill or downhill with-
out curb. Turn the wheel
towards the edge of the
road so that the car,
should it move, will not
roll towards the middle of
the road.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 178 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
179Starting and driving
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. three to four months, the following
steps are recommended:
Drain the washer fluid reservoir and
hoses.
Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
and lubricate them with glycerol
(glycerine).
After washing the car, dry the brake discs
to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on
the road and applying the brakes a few
times.
Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation
forming in it.
Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
Park the car in a dry, covered and well-
ventilated building. Leave the parking
brake OFF!
Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft
top should be closed.
If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave
the parking brake off.
Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the storage
period, remove the battery and store it in
a frost-free place.
If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
stands, increase the tire pressure to
43 psi (3 bar).
Leave all the door windows open a crack
and cover the car with a non-plastic
tarpaulin – not one made of plastic which will
not breath.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 179 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
180 Starting and driving
Saab Parking
Assistance 3
Saab Parking Assistance
Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in the
rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft
(1.8 meters) behind the car.
If the car is heavily laden, the system may
falsely indicate that there is an object within
the detection range. This is since the sen-
sors are angled towards the ground when
the car is tail-heavy.
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects, such as a post, since the surface
area presented to the car is too small.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. Audible
confirmation is given and the following text
is shown on the SID:
If a warning message, such as the seatbelt
reminder, is shown on the SID when reverse
is engaged, the audible signals from the
parking assistance system will not be heard
since the warning message has priority.
When the sensors detect an object within
the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)
will be heard. The frequency of these pulses
increases as the car comes closer to the
object.
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
The parking assistance system can
facilitate parking and reversing.
Bear in mind that small objects, such
as a child lying on the ground, and
narrow objects cannot always be
detected by the system.
Parking assistance
active
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
93_U S_M 07.book Page 180 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
181Starting and driving
If you stop the car with reverse gear
engaged, the sound pulse will stop after
2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if
you continue to reverse. If the car rolls for-
ward while reverse is engaged, the system
is silenced.
When the distance to the object is less
than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will
be heard.
When an object is approximately 3 ft.
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly (frequency
increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)
is suitable if you wish to load or unload the
trunk.
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
3 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly con-
nected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
the system is automatically deactivated.
Reversing alongside a wall
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
2 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
Cars with trailer hitch
If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is
correctly connected to the car’s electrical
system, the Saab Parking Assistance auto-
matically compensates for the protrusion of
the tow bar.
If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the
trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to
the car’s electrics, the system is automati-
cally deactivated.
You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
Parking Assistance as follows:
Engage reverse and press the CLR
button on the SID control panel.
The system will be reactivated the next time
you engage reverse.
NOTICE
The sensors must be kept clean to func-
tion well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect
their sensitivity.
Large quantities of snow or dirt covering
the sensors can prevent the parking
assistance system from detecting any
objects.
Do not spray the sensors with a pressure
washer, as this can damage them.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 181 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
182 Starting and driving
Error messages
If the system malfunctions, the following
message will appear on the SID:
If the system is subject to interference, the
following message will be shown on the
SID:
If this message appears, clean the sensors.
The sensors are located in the black trim on
the rear bumper
The system can be switched off using
Settings.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls, or .
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Park Assistance.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select ON or OFF.
6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Explanation of ON and OFF.
Parking assistance
malfunction. Service.
Parking assistance
sensor interference.
Park Assistance
ON
OFF
ON
Saab Parking Assistance is activated
automatically when reverse is
engaged. The system warns of objects
behind the car.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
connected to the trailer connector, the
system will be deactivated automati-
cally. You can also deactivate the sys-
tem temporarily with the CLR button if
reverse has been engaged and the
system is active.
OFF
Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 182 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
183Starting and driving
Economical driving
Factors affecting fuel
consumption
The fuel consumption of a car is greatly
affected by driving conditions, climate, road
conditions, speed, driving technique, etc.
Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat
higher during the break-in period (the
first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).
Weather conditions
Summer temperatures give better fuel
economy than winter ones. The difference
can be as much as about 10%. Consump-
tion increases in cold weather because the
engine takes longer to reach its normal
operating temperature. The transmission
and wheel bearings also take longer to
warm up. Even distance affects consump-
tion: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)
do not give the engine enough time to
reach its optimum temperature. Wind con-
ditions also have a marked effect on fuel
consumption.
How to read the diagram:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
100 km), the actual fuel consumption
3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
It is clear from the diagram that both dis-
tance driven and outside temperature have
a significant impact on fuel consumption,
after a cold start.
If the car is normally driven on short jour-
neys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
and from work, the average consumption
will be 60–80% above the normal level.
Driving techniques
To obtain the best running economy, with
regard to fuel consumption and general
wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
frequent braking and much changing
down all give higher fuel consumption.
Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a camper all
increase fuel consumption.
Do not warm up the engine while the car
is stationary.
If idling, the engine will take much longer
to reach its optimum temperature, and
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 183 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
184 Starting and driving
engine wear is at its greatest during this
period. Drive off as soon as possible after
starting the engine and avoid high engine
speeds.
Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as
possible. Match your driving to the
prevailing traffic conditions.
Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher
fuel consumption than driving in a high
gear because of the higher engine speed
for any given road speed. Always shift up
as soon as traffic conditions allow and
drive in the highest gear as much as
possible.
Check the tire pressure once a month.
Incorrect tire pressure increases tire
wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure
to be slightly high than too low. Under-
pressure increases fuel consumption.
Check the fuel consumption regularly.
Increased fuel consumption can indicate
that something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
Practical road tests have demonstrated that
substantial savings in fuel consumption can
be made if the above advice is followed.
Road conditions
Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
Engine block heater 3
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
Lower fuel consumption.
Reduced wear on the engine.
Inside of car warms up faster.
Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
The warmer it is outside, the shorter the time
the engine heater needs to be connected.
Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
this in the trunk.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 184 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
185Starting and driving
Driving in cold weather
In cold weather, special attention should be
paid to the following:
Before driving off, make sure that the
wiper blades have not frozen to the wind-
shield.
Remove any snow from the heating
system air intakes between the hood and
the windshield.
If necessary, inject oil into the locks to
prevent them from freezing. Use molyb-
denum-sulphide oil (MoS
2
). If the locks
freeze, exercise care when unlocking the
car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.
It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires are
in good condition.
For how to check the level of antifreeze in
the engine coolant, see page 209.
Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling
several times before the onset of winter.
This will prevent condensation water in
the fuel tank from freezing and causing
interruptions in the fuel supply. The likeli-
hood of condensation is lowest when the
fuel tank is full.
If the car is parked outside and the
temperature is below zero, gasoline anti-
freeze is of little use as it cannot remove
water that has already frozen. Park the
car in a warm place so that any ice that
may have built up melts, then add gaso-
line anti-freeze when refueling.
Condensation is caused by temperature
fluctuations, either in the outside temper-
ature alone or when the car is alternately
parked outdoors and in a garage.
Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top
at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although this has been achieved at
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter tires be fitted. However, winter tires
achieve this extra grip at the expense of
grip on bare road surfaces.
Winter tires, particularly studded tires, gen-
erally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries. If winter tires are fitted, the same
type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
Saab dealer will be pleased to advise you on
the best tires for your car.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 185 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
186 Starting and driving
Remember that tires age: it may therefore
be necessary to change winter tires before
they reach the legal wear limit, as they grad-
ually lose their friction properties with age.
If you get into a front wheel skid and the car
has a manual transmission, the best
response is to freewheel, which means
declutching so that the wheels neither drive
nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
desired direction.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
off the accelerator slightly and steer cau-
tiously in the desired direction.
If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the
same direction as the movement of the rear
of the car.
Driving with tire chains 3
Snow chains must only be fitted to the wheel
and tire dimensions that Saab recommends
in "Technical data" on page 279.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer regarding approved tire chains. See
also page 248.
WARNING
Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
(50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.
Tire chains can reduce directional
stability.
Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
wheels.
NOTICE
Check the links frequently for wear.
Check that the chains do not foul the
wheel arch liner at full lock.
Refer to the "Technical data" section
on page 279, for information on wheel
and tire dimensions approved for the
fitting of tire chains.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 186 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
187Starting and driving
Driving in hot climates
Always check the coolant level before start-
ing a journey. When the engine is cold, the
coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD
mark on the expansion tank (boundary
between the upper and lower sections of the
tank).
At the end of a journey, allow the engine to
idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone, the following message
will be shown on the SID:
1 Stop the car but do not switch off the
engine. Do not remove the cap on the
cooling system expansion tank, even if
the tank is empty. The engine tempera-
ture should decrease. If the temperature
continues to rise with the engine idling,
the engine must be switched off.
2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
normal temperature is shown (about in
the middle of the scale) before switching
off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
topped up, carefully unscrew the
expansion tank cap.
Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
antifreeze and 50 % clean water. Use an
antifreeze approved by Saab.
3 Have the car’s cooling system checked.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
Hot engine. Make a
safe stop. Idle engine.
WARNING
Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap
completely when the engine is hot.
The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapour can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before removing
it.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 187 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
188 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer 3
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
requirements regarding speed limits for
towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
braking requirements, and also any spe-
cial driving licence provisions.
Trailer hitch attachment 3
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
with trailer brakes.
An electrical connection 3 for the towbar
and an electrical unit are provided in the
electrical centre on the left-hand side of the
luggage compartment.
If the car has a 13-pin Saab genuine electri-
cal socket then it is possible to supply a
trailer/caravan with rear fog lights and
reversing lights. The caravan can also have
interior and exterior lighting even when the
car’s ignition is switched off. In which case,
remember not to load the battery for too
long so that it is discharged and pre-
vents the car from starting.
There is also access to power in the caravan
during a journey, the caravan battery can be
charged for example.
Also, if the car has SPA, this is deactivated
automatically if a trailer is hitched up and
correctly connected to the Saab genuine
trailer socket.
Saab recommendations:
Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is
designed and tested for your Saab.
Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
which trailer hitch is designed for your car.
WARNING
Do not drive with a trailer on inclines
steeper than 15 %. The load on the
drive (front) wheels will be so low that
the wheels can start to spin and
prevent further progress.
In addition, the car’s parking brake
may not always be sufficient to hold
the car and trailer securely, as the
wheels may start to slide.
Always apply the trailer’s parking
brake when unhitching it. There is
otherwise a risk of personal injury or
damage to the bumper should the
trailer start to roll.
When you hitch up the trailer be sure
to attach its safety chains to the holes
by the hitch.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 188 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
189Starting and driving
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-
ing important considerations in mind.
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
The following steps are taken in order as the
temperature of the transmission increases:
Gear change pattern is altered
A/C compressor is switched off
Max. engine torque is reduced
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot:
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
NOTICE
Only use a towbar that has been
approved for your car. We recom-
mend that you entrust towbar installa-
tion to an authorised Saab workshop,
which can also provide important
information such as trailer weight.
Your authorised Saab workshop has
information on how the towbar is to be
installed and whether other measures
must be undertaken that could affect
the cooling system or other equipment
We recommend that you contact a
Saab dealer for guidance on how to
connect a trailer hitch.
Exercise care when driving on uneven
roads or against the curb if the car is
heavily laden. This particularly applies
to cars with 17" wheels.
Gradient of
hill, %
Max. trailer
weight, lbs.
(kg)
Time limit,
minutes
6-8 3330 (1500) unlimited
9-11 3080 (1400) max. 15
12-14 2645 (1200) max. 15
max. 15 2200 (1000) max. 15
Gradient of
hill, %
Max. trailer
weight, lbs.
(kg)
Time limit,
minutes
6-8 2200 (1000) unlimited
9-11 1760 (800) max. 15
12-14 1100 (500) max. 15
max. 15 880 (400) max. 15
Gearbox too hot. Make a
safe stop. Open hood.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 189 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
190 Starting and driving
When continuing your journey, manually
select a low gear in which the engine speed
is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
(see page 168).
Recommendations for cars with
manual transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
When the needle is just outside the red
zone, the A/C compressor will be switched
off and, on certain engine variants, the max-
imum engine torque will be limited.
When continuing your journey, select a low
gear in which the engine speed is about
3,500 rpm until the incline eases.
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. With a
two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over
the wheels and keep it as low as possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the load
on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be included in the
total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
may have to be reduced by the correspond-
ing amount.
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the
brakes when you are driving on a long or
steep downhill slope.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Distribution of load in trailer
a Light
b Moderate
cHeavy
93_U S_M 07.book Page 190 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
191Starting and driving
Checks before driving
Make sure that the car and trailer are in
good working order. This is essential since
towing a trailer increases the strain on the
car.
Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and trailer.
Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and trailer is properly secured and
adjusted.
Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is
properly connected and is not so long that
it drags along the ground. Also, make
sure the cable is not too short and risks
breaking when turning a corner.
Check all bulbs.
Check the car and trailer brakes.
Make sure that all items on or in the
camper or trailer are properly secured.
Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel
is raised and locked.
Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and trailer are well balanced.
Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
correctly attached.
Driving considerations
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking performance reduced. The
trailer’s braking system and suspension
also have a considerable effect on these
characteristics. See also "Driving with a
load" on page 194.
Drive carefully:
descending hills
on uneven roads
over railway crossings
when meeting large vehicles
If the car has automatic transmission, select
gear M1 when ascending or descending
steep hills.
Reversing
Get someone to help you keep an eye out
behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
always provide sufficient rearward vision
when reversing.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 191 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
192 Starting and driving
Driving with a roof rack
load
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
must be included in the car’s maximum per-
missible payload and axle load.
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for your car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
securely.
Fitting roof carriers 3
Sport Sedan and SportCombi without
roof rails
1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
car.
2 Insert a screw with washer into each roof
carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
3 The roof carriers are marked front and
back.
4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
the roof.
5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
mounted.
WARNING
A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
Adjust your speed to the prevailing
conditions.
Due to higher aerodynamics drag, fuel
economy may suffer when driving with
a roof rack.
Mounting holes for roof carrier
93_U S_M 07.book Page 192 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
193Starting and driving
Fitting roof carriers 3
SportCombi with roof rails
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross
members to see which is the front and
which is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
centre supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the
distance between the cross members is
at least 700 mm.
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positioned so that the
tailgate can be opened fully without
hitting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket
so that it lies snugly against the
outside of the roof rail. Make sure that
the roof carriers are seated centrally on
the rubber spacers and that these sit
correctly on the roof rail. Pull the spacers
down slightly on the inside of the roof
rail.
5 Centre the roof carriers so that they
protrude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 193 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
194 Starting and driving
Driving with a load
The handling characteristics are affected by
how the car is loaded.
Driving with the trunk lid
open
If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) and set the cabin fan to its high-
est speed setting.
Driving in deep water
NOTICE
Place the heaviest load as far forward
and as low as possible in the trunk.
Secure the load to the lashing eyes
(see page 139).
Heavy loads mean that the car’s
center of gravity is further back. As a
result, the car will sway more during
evasive steering.
Never exceed the permissible load of
the roof box, even if there is room for
more.
Ensure that the tire pressure is correct
– slight overinflation is preferable to
underinflation.
The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance
from the vehicle in front.
Do not exceed the car’s permissible
gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
page 280).
Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
For further information on tires see
page 241.
WARNING
Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or
fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
NOTICE
Do not drive in puddles or water deeper
than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
sucked into the engine. The engine will be
seriously damaged if water enters the
intake system.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 194 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
195Starting and driving
Driving at night
Bear in mind the following points, especially
when driving at night:
Nighttime driving requires your full
concentration
Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
The number of drivers under the influence
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles.
Avoid driving at night if you have poor
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
age.
Keep your car’s headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
Make sure you are well rested before
starting a long journey. Take a break
every other hour.
Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and
dawn.
Check the headlight levelling setting (see
page 97).
Towing the car
Front towing eye
WARNING
Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
Never allow passengers to ride in the
car when it is on tow.
Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be recovered.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position if the car is moved with the
engine not running.
The steering wheel lock must be
disengaged before towing the car.
The steering wheel lock disengages
when the remote control is inserted
into the ignition switch, if the battery
has sufficient charge.
WARNING
Make sure that the towing eye is
screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
thread!
The towing eye is only designed for
towing the car on roads. It must not
be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
for example.
Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should snap. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause seriously injury.
Never drive with the towing eye fitted
to the front bumper. Return it to its
designated storage space.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 195 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
197Starting and driving
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
being jerked violently.
Cars with automatic transmission:
Always observe the speed limit for vehicles
on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
must not be towed at speeds exceeding
30 mph (50 km/h) nor for a distance of more
than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
transported over a longer distance, a tow
truck or flatbed truck must be called out.
The engine cannot be started by towing or
pushing the car. In an emergency, the
engine can be started as described under
"Jump starting" on page 198.
Vehicle recovery
If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
truck, or similar, it must be securely
strapped down. There are attachment
points for this purpose on the underside of
the car. The attachment points are oblong
hole that have been reinforced to cope with
the stresses that arise during this type of
transport.
Transporting the car
NOTICE
The car must be towed front first.
If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
NOTICE
If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
Attachment points for anchorage straps
93_U S_M 07.book Page 197 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
198 Starting and driving
Jump starting
It is essential when a donor battery is to be
used to jump start the car that the jump
leads be connected correctly to prevent
arcing.
To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
vehicles are not touching each other. If
a poor connection on the negative
jumper cable should exist, it is possible
for damage to be caused to electrical
systems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off lights that are not needed, and
radios. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries and it could save
your radio.
WARNING
When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery. Therefore, always
avoid sparks and open flames in the
vicinity of the battery.
The battery contains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water. If
acid gets into the eyes or a large quan-
tity makes contact with the skin, seek
medical help.
NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
NOTICE
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in
Neutral.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 198 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
199Starting and driving
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
short that could injure you or would
damage the battery and maybe other
parts as well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to
the good battery’s negative terminal.
9 Attach the cable to the discharged
battery’s negative terminal.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the
discharged battery. If it does not start
after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Note. If the current in the low battery is
too low it might be necessary to wait
several minutes with the cables
connected before you can start the
engine with the low battery.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
NOTICE
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
WARNING
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
Jump starting
93_U S_M 07.book Page 199 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
200 Starting and driving
Using a battery charger 3/starter
unit
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
system and electronics, the following rules
must be followed when charging the battery
or jump starting the car.
If the charger or starter unit can be set to
different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V
must be selected.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
No other apparatus that are grounded or
connected to the mains must be
connected to the car during charging or
jump starting.
The charger or starter unit must under no
conditions produce a voltage greater
than:
16V continuous
18V for 60 min.
If you are unsure about the charge rating of
the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from
the positive terminal before connecting the
unit to the battery.
For long trips
Before starting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car inspected by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
engine or gearbox/transmission.
Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
replace if it shows any signs of wear.
Check the battery charge.
Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
tire.
Take an extra remote control and keep it
separate.
Check the brakes.
Check all bulbs.
Check for the presence of the tool kit and
jack in the car.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 200 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
201Car care
Hood ________________ 202
Engine ______________ 202
Engine bay, 4-cyl engine 205
Engine bay, V6 engine _ 206
Engine oil ____________ 207
Air filter______________ 209
Transmission fluid ____ 209
Coolant______________ 209
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads__________ 211
Power steering________ 212
Battery ______________ 213
Drive belt ____________ 216
Wipers and washers ___ 217
Wiper blades _________ 217
Changing bulbs _______ 219
Fuses ________________ 234
Tires _________________ 241
Compact spare ________ 254
Changing a tire ________ 257
Safety belts ___________ 260
Upholstery and trim ____ 260
Textile carpeting _______ 261
Engine bay____________ 261
Washing ______________ 261
Waxing and polishing___ 264
Touching up the paint___ 264
Anti-corrosion treatment 265
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials ____________ 267
Air conditioning (A/C)___ 268
Car care
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 201 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
202 Car care
Hood
The hood release handle is located on the
left under the instrument panel. Open the
hood in the following way:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The hood moves to the half-locked posi-
tion and is stopped by a safety catch at
the front edge.
3 Press the lever of the catch upwards and
raise the hood.
When you close the hood you should drop it
from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),
without slamming it.
Engine
Turbo 4-cylinder engine
The engine is a transverse four-cylinder in-
line engine with twin overhead camshafts
and 16 valves.
The engine is equipped with two balance-
shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a
minimum.
The balance shafts are chain-driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods. The effect occurs
twice in each revolution of the engine, coun-
teracting the vibration from its moving parts,
and at the same time reducing unwanted
engine noise.
The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
from the front), is integrated with the engine.
Turbo V6 engine
The V6 engine is a turbocharged V6 engine
produced completely of aluminium with 60°
between the cylinder banks, 4 valves per
cylinder, 2 camshafts per bank.
The camshafts are driven via a chain trans-
mission. The engine is equipped with a
turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pres-
sure from both banks of cylinders.
To obtain optimum performance, fuel con-
sumption and low emission levels the
Hood release catch plate
Hood release handle
93_U S_M 07.book Page 202 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
203Car care
engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous
Variable Cam Phasing). This means that
the engine’s intake camshafts can be
adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.
The switches are hydraulic.
Engine families
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label in the engine bay.
These engine families meet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dards and Canadian Federal Standards and
are equipped with the following systems:
sequential multiport fuel injection system
three way catalytic converter
crankcase emissions control system
evaporative emission system.
Emission control
systems
The systems for controlling emissions to the
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
Saab Trionic engine
management system, 4-cyl
engine
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
Intake manifold pressure.
Intake air temperature.
Crankshaft position.
Engine coolant temperature.
Throttle position.
The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 203 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
204 Car care
Bosch ME9 engine management
system, V6 engine
The Bosch ME9 engine management
system is a system that combines sequen-
tial multiport fuel injection, electronic distrib-
utorless ignition and turbocharger boost
pressure control into one system and intake
camshaft phasing control.
The ME9 engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
Charge air pressure.
Intake air temperature.
Crankshaft position.
Engine coolant temperature.
Throttle position.
The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
By processing all of this information, the
ME9 system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing, intake camshaft
phasing and turbocharger boost pressure to
provide excellent engine performance while
maintaining low emissions and fuel con-
sumption.
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
All hydrocarbons formed when refueling will
be recovered by the car and not released
into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
absorbed in an evaporative emission canis-
ter. When the engine is subsequently
started, the evaporative emission canister is
gradually purged as air is sucked into it
through a shut-off valve. The hydrocar-
bon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned. “Refueling”, see
page 157.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked 3 times.
NOTICE
The Trionic engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
the main instrument illuminates, the
Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a workshop as
soon as possible. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
The ME9 engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
the main instrument illuminates, the ME9
ECM has detected a problem. The car will
continue to operate, but performance
may be diminished. You should have your
car checked by a workshop as soon as
possible. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 204 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
205Car care
1 Oil filler cap
2 Coolant reservoir
3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
4Battery
5 Fuse box
6 Washer-fluid reservoir
7 Power-steering fluid reservoir
8 Engine-oil dipstick
Engine bay, 4-cyl engine
93_U S_M 07.book Page 205 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
206 Car care
1 Power-steering fluid resrvoir
2 Coolant reservoir
3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
4Battery
5 Fuse box
6 Washer-fluid reservoir
7 Oil filler cap
8 Engine-oil dipstick
Engine bay, V6 engine
93_U S_M 07.book Page 206 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
207Car care
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level regularly.
1 Park the car on a level ground.
2 Switch off the engine and wait for
2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
normal operating temperature.
3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
a clean rag before carrying out the
check.
The level must not be below the MIN mark
on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
result in abnormal oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).
4-cyl engine: The engine oil level is
checked each time the engine is started. If
the oil level is low, the following message
appears on the SID:
If this occurs the oil level must be checked
first. If the level is too low then it must be
topped up.
V6 engine: The engine has an oil level
sensor that checks the oil level when the
engine is running. If the oil level drops too
low, the following message appears on the
SID:
If this occurs the oil level must be checked
first. If the level is too low then it must be
topped up.
NOTICE
Too high oil level can damage the engine.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Oil filler cap and dipstick, 4-cyl engine Oil filler cap and dipstick, V6 engine
93_U S_M 07.book Page 207 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
208 Car care
Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap
properly after topping up the oil to avoid
running problems.
It is normal for an engine to consume a cer-
tain amount of oil. It is therefore often nec-
essary to top up the oil between services.
Check the engine oil level regularly.
During the Break-in Period (approx.
3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving
at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil con-
sumption may be higher than normal.
NOTICE
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently if the car is
being used under certain conditions, see
page 275.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
skin contact whenever possible.
Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by
washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Keep oil out of reach of children.
Do not touch the turbocharger or
exhaust manifold. These get very hot
when the engine has been running.
Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engine as this could cause a fire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
Protect the environment. Do not
dispose of oil into the ground or down
a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
oil filters at an appropriate disposal
facility.
NOTICE
Do not run the engine with the oil level
too low.
Change engine oil and oil filter in
accordance with the service
programme
Only use the recommended type of oil.
Observe the above three points to avoid
serious damage to the engine.
For oil volumes and grades, refer to
page 284.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 208 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
209Car care
Air filter
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
Automatic transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
Coolant
There is an overpressure in the cooling sys-
tem. Coolant temperatures can sometimes
exceed 212° F (100° C).
If the coolant level drops too low, the follow-
ing message appears on the SID:
The properties of the coolant are retained
for the entire service life of the car. There-
fore, it is not necessary to change the cool-
ant.
The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and
anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
cooling effect. Lower concentrations should
be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
Coolants of a different brand could damage
the engine or cooling system. We therefore
recommend strict use of coolants that have
been approved by Saab.
Note:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-
time properties will be affected. Even if the
coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.
WARNING
To ensure reliable operation, only use
an air filter recommended by Saab
Automobile AB.
WARNING
Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
Coolant level low.
Refill.
NOTICE
If the cooling system needs topping up,
mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
quantity of drinking water or distilled
water before adding it to the system.
If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
engine could still freeze and be damaged.
This is because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the ther-
mostat has opened to allow full circula-
tion.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 209 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
210 Car care
4-cyl engine: The expansion tank is trans-
parent to facilitate checking the coolant
level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie
on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on
the expansion tank (boundary between the
upper and lower sections of the tank, see
illustration).
Top up with a mixture of equal parts of
Saab-approved concentrated coolant and
clean water. We recommend that you con-
tact an authorised Saab workshop.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine until warm so that
the thermostat opens. Top up the tank
again, as necessary.
V6 engine: The expansion tank is not trans-
parent. The cap must be unscrewed so that
the coolant level can be checked. When the
cap is screwed off there are two level mark-
ings, HOT and COLD.
When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie
on or just above the COLD mark in the
expansion tank.
Coolant expansion tank, V6 engine Level markings, V6 engine
1HOT
2COLD
Coolant expansion tank, 4-cyl engine
93_U S_M 07.book Page 210 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
211Car care
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads
Checking
Brake fluid should be changed according to
the service program. Refer to the Warranty
and Service Book.
The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is trans-
parent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.
The fluid level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks.
If the level drops too low, the following
message appears on the SID:
Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake
fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
container.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
If the brake fluid should require chang-
ing, this must be carried out at a Saab
dealer. We recommend that you contact
a Saab dealer.
The foot brake and parking brake are self-
adjusting.
It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
the brake pads are worn and need replac-
ing. It is therefore essential that brake pads
be checked regularly, as specified in the
service program.
Brake pads should only be changed at a
workshop. We recommend that you con-
tact a Saab dealer.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
water from the air and, in time, could allow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed
regularly, as specified in the service
program.
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
Brake fluid reservoir
93_U S_M 07.book Page 211 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
212 Car care
Power steering
Check the level of the power steering fluid in
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point directly forwards
during this check.
Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.
Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw
down the cap completely and then remove
it again.
The oil level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
level will be lower, and at a higher tempera-
tures the level will be higher.
Top up with CHF 11S or CHF 202 power
steering fluid.
WARNING
Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.
Power steering fluid reservoir, 4-cyl
engine
Power steering fluid reservoir, V6 engine
93_U S_M 07.book Page 212 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
213Car care
Battery
Check the charge state and electrolyte level
of the battery regularly.
If frequent short journeys are made, the
battery may need extra charging. This can
be done with a battery charger or by taking
the car for a long run.
If the battery is not being charged while the
engine is running, the following message
will appear on the SID:
Check the drive belt (see page 216). If the
belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
the battery may not be charged and the A/C
compressor may not work.
WARNING
When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the
battery.
The battery contains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling
NOTICE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture. Batteries should therefore always be
stored away from sub-zero temperatures.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Checking the battery electrolyte level.
Level correct if level indicator dark.
Battery should be changed if indicator is
light
93_U S_M 07.book Page 213 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
214 Car care
Always connect the positive (red) cable to
the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
both battery leads when boost charging the
battery.
A car with standard equipment specifica-
tions and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
may only be sufficient for about 15 days.
NOTICE
If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 198.
Do not connect the battery termi-
nals, + and –, incorrectly.
Serious damage can occur to the car’s
electrical system if a battery or alterna-
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
Exercise special care when removing
and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
not to damage the battery disconnect
switch.
Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to
unlock the battery cover.
Battery bracket
93_U S_M 07.book Page 214 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
215Car care
Battery disconnect switch 3
A collision could cause a short circuit in the
alternator or starter motor. A disconnect
switch by the battery’s positive terminal cuts
off the battery from the alternator and starter
motor when the airbags and seatbelt pre-
tensioners are detonated.
WARNING
If the battery disconnect switch has
tripped, do not reset it until you have visu-
ally inspected the car’s electrical system.
If there are visible signs of damage, have
the car checked at a workshop before
resetting the disconnect switch. We
recommend that you contact an author-
ised Saab workshop.
NOTICE
Exercise special care when removing and
fitting the positive (+) cable so as not to
damage the battery disconnect switch.
Battery disconnect switch with reset
button
93_U S_M 07.book Page 215 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
216 Car care
Drive belt
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine. It is driven by a
poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.
A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
result in:
no charge to the battery
no A/C compressor function.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
WARNING
Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
belts when engine is running.
Always stop the engine before
inspecting the drive belt.
The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.
NOTICE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
Drive belt, 4-cyl engine Drive belt, V6 engine
93_U S_M 07.book Page 216 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
217Car care
Wipers and washers
Wiper blades
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with washer fluid. This
is particularly important if the car has been
through an automatic car wash, as these
sometimes leave a wax coating on the wind-
shield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Windshield
1 Press in the catch (1).
2 Pull the complete wiper blade down-
wards so that it comes away from the
wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
from the arm.
Rear window, SportCombi
1 Detach the blade from the arm by press-
ing on the mounting for the blade from
below.
2 Fit the new blade by pressing the shaft
of the blade into the arm's mounting.
The washer jet, which is located next to the
high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.
Change of wiper blades, windshield Change of wiper blades, rear window,
SportCombi
93_U S_M 07.book Page 217 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
218 Car care
Washers
The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.
(5.8 litres).
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
to prioritize the windshield. The following
message is displayed on the SID:
Headlight washers are only available on
certain markets.
Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water
as recommended by the table on
the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
page 102).
Washer jets
The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
be cleaned with a pin if necessary.
WARNING
Take care not to spill washer fluid concen-
trate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
concentrate can contain flammable ingre-
dients such as alcohol.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Washer fluid reservoir
93_U S_M 07.book Page 218 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
219 Car care
Changing bulbs
Autochecking of lights
The bulbs that are most important from the
point of view of traffic safety are monitored
by the car’s electrical system. If one of these
bulbs should fail, a message will be dis-
played on the SID.
Example of SID message:
The following bulbs are not checked: park-
ing lights, front fog lights, reversing lights,
license plate lighting, side marker lights and
side direction indicators.
SportCombi
The tail lights and brake lights consist of
LEDs. If approx. 3/4 of the LEDs on one side
are broken then this is indicated in the SID.
If a stop light bulb fails
Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the
adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
bulb when possible.
All rear light bulbs are of the same type and
rated 21 W, with the exception of the license
plate lighting which is rated 5 W.
Wrong bulb fitted
If a low or main beam bulb of too high a
rating is fitted, a bulb failure message will be
shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
can damage the reflector).
If the following message is displayed but the
bulb shines, it is most likely that an incorrect
bulb has been fitted.
Note:
When changing bulbs, fit the same type
of bulb (e.g. Long-Life) as that removed.
Headlight aiming, page 269.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine
bay, switch off the engine to avoid the
danger of fingers and hands being
injured by moving parts.
The radiator fan can cut in even when the
engine is switched off.
NOTICE
Switch off the ignition before changing a
bulb, to avoid possible short-circuiting.
Left low beam failure.
Right high beam failure.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 219 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
220Car care
Xenon headlight, low beam 3
Xenon headlights produce roughly two
times as much light as halogen bulbs and
have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge
lamp containing xenon. When the lights are
switched on a very high voltage activates
the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full
intensity.
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic
levelling. The levelling system is comprised
of two sensors, one on the front suspension
and one on the rear suspension, and a
control unit by the engine bay fuse box.
Headlight alignment is adjusted automati-
cally to the car’s load to prevent dazzling
drivers in oncoming traffic.
If a fault is detected in the system, the fol-
lowing message will be displayed on the
SID:
WARNING
Xenon headlights are high tension. All
work on xenon headlights, including
changing bulbs, must be carried out by
dealer personnel.
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
We recommend you to contact a Saab
dealer to have a xenon headlight changed
93_U S_M 07.book Page 220 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
221 Car care
Low beam, halogen
Left-hand side
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 240.
Both sides
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Left-hand side
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
Retainers on the battery cover Changing the low beam bulb
93_U S_M 07.book Page 221 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
222Car care
High beam, halogen
Left-hand side
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 240.
Both sides
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Left-hand side
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
Retainers on the battery cover Changing the high beam bulb
93_U S_M 07.book Page 222 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
223Car care
Parking lights
The parking light bulb is located in the same
reflector as the main beam bulb.
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
Both sides:
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the
headlight.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the head-
light.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Front turn signal bulbs
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 223 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
224 Car care
Both sides:
1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it.
2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the
headlight lens when fitting the bulb.
Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
rear end can be pulled out.
2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
Change the bulb.
3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
edge of the opening. Then press in the
front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 224 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
225Car care
Front fog lights 3
1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
Lower the air shield.
2 Remove the protective cover. Release
the two spring clips securing the bulb.
3 Unplug the connector.
4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
The height of the beam can be adjusted
using a screwdriver inserted through the
hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.
Side marker lights
1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
part can be pulled out.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 When refitting, make sure that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge of the bumper trim.
WARNING
Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack. Always use
axle stands.
Refer to the information on jacks on
pages 257 and 258.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 225 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
226 Car care
Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the
adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
bulb when possible.
Taillights, Sport Sedan
1 Turn signals
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
Taillights, Convertible
1 Turn signals
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
Taillights, SportCombi
1 Turn signals
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
93_U S_M 07.book Page 226 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
229Car care
Changing bulbs
1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a
bayonet fitting.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Refit the bulb holder.
To refit the trunk lid trim
1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
Dome light, front, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of
the lens and press the lens home.
Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both sides of the front edge.
2 Fit the new bulb.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 229 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
230 Car care
Dome light, Convertible
1 Pull down the rear edge of the light
fitting.
2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open
the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb
out of the bulb holder.
If one of the outer bulbs needs replacing,
turn the light fitting round. Change the
bulb from the reverse of the lighting
fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.
3 Position the front edge of the light fitting
and press the fitting up towards the
windscreen rail.
Hatch opened for replacement of centre
bulb
Reverse side of the light fitting. The
arrows mark the outer bulbs
93_U S_M 07.book Page 230 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
231Car care
License plate lighting
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Make sure the seal on the lens is
correctly seated.
4 Refit the lens and tighten the two
screws.
Glove box lighting 3
1 Remove the lamp housing using a short
screwdriver.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan
The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
shelf.
1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
one end.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 231 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
232 Car care
Trunk lighting, Convertible
1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first.
2 Change the bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Trunk lighting, SportCombi
1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it
out at the front.
2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in
the holder.
3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the
lamp housing and then pressing in the
rear edge.
Courtesy/floor lighting 3
1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
using a screwdriver.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, we rec-
ommend that you visit a Saab dealer.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 232 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
233 Car care
Bulb table
No. Designation Watt-
age
1 H7 55 Headlight
2 H3 55 Front fog lights 3
3 P21W 21 Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
reversing lights
4 PY21W 21 Direction indicator, front/rear
5 R10W 10 Rear dome lighting; courtesy
lighting 3; glove box lighting; trunk
lighting, Convertible
6 R5W 5 License plate lighting; trunk lighting,
Sport Sedan
7 T4W 4 Reading light, rear
8 WY5W/W5W 5 Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
parking lights; front dome lighting
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 233 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
234 Car care
Fuses
The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
the dash, one in the engine bay (additional
small unit in front of battery) and one on the
left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
end of the dash.
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
fuse has blown.
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following should be heeded:
We recommend that you allways
consult an Saab dealer before modify-
ing or adding any electrical equip-
ment. Failure to do so can result in the
electrical system being damaged.
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating than specified (see
page 236). The color of the fuse indi-
cates its amperage.
If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked without
delay. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
93_U S_M 07.book Page 234 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
235Car care
A special tool for removing fuses is provided
on the hatch on the left-hand end of the
dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
squeeze and remove the fuse.
Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not
connected to the car’s electrical system.
MAXI fuses
The car also has a number of large fuses
known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
to protect the car’s electrical system from
being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
number of electrical circuits and functions
and therefore has a higher rating (amper-
age) than the standard fuses. No spare
MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.
NOTICE
If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault
in the electrical system. Have the car
checked. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
Fuse panel in end of dash
93_U S_M 07.book Page 235 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
236Car care
Fuse panel in end of fascia
No. Amp. Function
1 15 Steering wheel lock
2 5 Steering column unit; ignition switch
3 10 Hands-free 3
4 10 Main instrument unit; automatic climate control
(ACC) 3
5 7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
(automatic transmission)
6 7.5 Brake light switch
7 20 Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door
8 30 Control module in passenger front door
9 10 Dash fuse panel
10 30 Trailer socket 3; electrical socket in storage com-
partment between seats 3
11 10 Data link connection (diagnostics)
12 15 Interior lighting incl. glove box
13 10 Accessories
14 20 Amplifier 2, Sound System 3
15 30 Control module in driver’s door
16 5 Passenger Sensing System
17 - -
18 - -
19 - -
20 7.5 Headlight levelling switch 3
21 7.5 Hands-free 3; brake light switch; manual climate
control 3; clutch pedal switch
22 30 Cigarette lighter 3
23 40 Cabin fan
24 7.5 Airbag control module
25 - -
26 5
Yaw sensor (cars with ESP
®
)
27 - -
93_U S_M 07.book Page 236 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
237 Car care
Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side
No. Amp. Function
1–5 MAXI -
6 30 Control module in left rear door
7 30 Control module in right rear door
820Trailer3
9--
10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right tail-
light; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
trailer lights
11 - -
12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3
16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3
17 7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror 3; rain sensor 3
18 15 Moonroof 3
19 - -
20 7.5 XM-radio 3, TMC-tuner 3
21 7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA) 3; control module in
rear doors; dome light (Convertible)
22 30 Radio 3; navigation 3
23 - -
24 10 Movement sensor 3; tilt sensor 3; dome light (Con-
vertible)
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3
Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan
93_U S_M 07.book Page 237 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
238Car care
26 30 Right-hand stop light; rear left turn signal; left taillight;
rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate light-
ing; trunk lighting; trailer lights
27 10 Convertible: Lumbar support, electrically adjustable
front seat 3
28 15 Telematics 3
29 - -
Trunk fuse panel, Convertible
93_U S_M 07.book Page 238 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
239 Car care
Fuse panel in engine bay
No. Amp. Function
1--
2 10 Engine control module; automatic transmission con-
trol module 3
320Horn
4 10 Engine control module; battery disconnect switch 3
5--
6 10 Selector lever, automatic transmission 3; clutch pedal
switch
7--
8 5 Relay for vacuumpump (brake system) 3
9--
10 - -
11 - -
12 10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
13 - -
14 - -
15 30 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
16 30 Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
front left fog light 3
17 30 Windshield wiper motor, low speed
18 30 Windshield wiper motor, high speed
19 20 Parking heater; auxiliary heater 3
20 10 Headlight levelling 3
21 - -
22 30 Washer fluid pump, windshield
23 - -
24 20 Flash-to-pass
25 20 Amplifier, sound system II 3
26 30 Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
fog light 3; right low beam; left high beam
27
–37
MAXI
93_U S_M 07.book Page 239 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
240Car care
Fuse panel in front of battery 3
Relays
R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
R2 -
R3 -
R4 -
R 5 Flash-to-pass
R6 Horn
R7 -
R8 Starter motor
R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
R11 Ignition +15
R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed
R13 -
R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
R15 -
R16 -
No. Amp. Function
1 - Air pump, secondary air 3
2 20 Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
probe)
310A/C compressor
4 30 Main relay
Relays
1-
2 A/C-compressor
3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 240 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
241Car care
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Saab Warranty and Service Record
Booklet for details.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehi-
cle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice:
Don’t let anyone tell you that
underinflation or overinflation is all
right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinfla-
tion), you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 292).
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
4 psi (28 kPa). When the temperature of the
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
sure will change 2 psi (14 kPa).
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
WARNING
Poor maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an blow-out
and a serious accident. See “” on
page 251.
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recom-
mended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 241 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
242 Car care
High speed operation
If you’ll be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is
legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the
maximum inflation pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), which-
ever is lower. See the example below.
When you end this high-speed driving,
return to the cold inflation pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See on page 251.
Example:
You’ll find maximum load and inflation pres-
sure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters near the rim flange. It will read some-
thing like this: Maximum load 690 kg
(1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press
For this example, you would set the inflation
pressure for high-speed driving at 35 psi
(244 kPa).
When to check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 10,000 miles
(16 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 243 and “Wheel
Replacement” on page 247 for more infor-
mation.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-
cle. The first rotation is the most important.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make
WARNING
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed.
Some high-speed rated tires require infla-
tion pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in
excellent condition, and set to the correct
cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
load.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 242 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
243Car care
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-
ened. See page 258.
Flat spotting
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experienced when the wheels need bal-
ancing.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If
the outdoor temperature is low it takes a
longer distance.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
to check the treadwear indicators, which will
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tires rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.
WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on
page 257.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 243 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
244 Car care
Treadwear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
label.
Before changing to wheels/tires of another
size, we recommend that you contact an
authorised Saab workshop regarding
acceptable options. See also page 290
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car’s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matched to the characteristics of the car and
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
Treadwear indicator
93_U S_M 07.book Page 244 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
245Car care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-
tion and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the side-
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-
form Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-
duction tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades, they must also
conform to federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire Perfor-
mance Criteria (TPC) standards.
NOTICE
Wide wheels and tires with side walls that
are too low can:
be damaged in potholes, etc.
cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
to be overloaded.
affect the function of the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP
®
).
The speed and load limits of the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 250.
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted
on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The
permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).
WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes or types (radial and bias-
belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size and type tires on all
wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was devel-
oped for use on your vehicle. See
“Compact spare” on page 254.
WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 245 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
246 Car care
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. Warn-
ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best overall per-
formance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-
ancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-
ing one way or the other, the alignment may
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 246 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
247Car care
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
with new Saab original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
vehicle.
Notice:
The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cool-
ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-
cle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a tire” on page 257.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.
WARNING
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
WARNING
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
original equipment wheel.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 247 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
248 Car care
Tire Chains
Notice:
If your vehicle does not have
235/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must.
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suit-
able snow chains. Install them on the
front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the
contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your
vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to
do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-
tain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts
much like a skid and may require the same
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-
ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
WARNING
If your vehicle has 235/45 R17 size tires,
don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manu-
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s
contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 248 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
249Car care
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into it´s sidewall.
Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a partic-
ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-
struction type and service description.
Department of Transportation (DOT):
The Department of Transportation (DOT)
code indicates that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-
ters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-
factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire.
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on the performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resis-
tance. For more information see “Uniform
Tire Quality Grading” on page 245.
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Max-
imum load that can be carried and the max-
imum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pres-
sure see “Recommended lowest tire pres-
sure, cold tires” on page 292 and “” on
page 251.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example
of a typical passenger car tire size.
Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-
cates the tire section width in millimeters
from sidewall to sidewall.
215 / 55 R 16 93 H
||||||
abcdef
aTire Width
b Aspect Ratio
c Belt Rating
d Rim diameter
e Load range
f Speed rating
93_U S_M 07.book Page 249 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
250 Car care
Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-
cates the tire height-to-width measure-
ments. For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-
tration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall
is 55% as high as it is wide.
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-
struction; and the letter “B” means belted-
bias ply construction.
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Load range: The load range represents the
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:
225 Tire section width, mm
45 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
as a percentage of the section
width
R Radial ply
17 Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead
seats
94 Tire load index
H Speed rating
Tire load indices
91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
(615 kg)
93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
95 Max. 1521 lbs. (690 kg)
97 Max. 1609 lbs. (730 kg)
Speed ratings
Q Tire approved for speeds up to
100 mph (160 km/h)
S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)
W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 250 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
251Car care
Loading Your Vehicle
This is an example of what your vehicle´s
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
and shows how much weight your vehicle
may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-
installed options.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the com-
bined weight of optional accessories, for
example, automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other rein-
forcing materials.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
alternate angles substantially less than 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
a tire has built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 241.
Curb weight: This means the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
and cargo.
This label can only be found on vehicles
sold in the U.S.
Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
information label in the glove box, see
page 293.
TIN-code
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
b Tire Size
c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture
93_U S_M 07.book Page 251 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
252 Car care
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-
dards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-
meric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see “”
on page 251.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle, see “” on page 281.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the rear axle, see “” on page 251.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-
cle capacity weight; and production options
weight.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-
sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
Normal occupant weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “” on
page 251.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-
ing positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a vehi-
cle. The side of the tire that contains a white-
wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-
turer, brand and or model name molding on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehi-
cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-
tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 241 and
“” on page 251.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and
the road surface. The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
across the tread of a tire when only
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
Time for New Tires” on page 243.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 252 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
253Car care
Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-
dards, a tire information system that pro-
vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-
ings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The
rating are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
page 245.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of
designated seating positions multipled by
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
load. See “” on page 251.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
on an individual tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant weight and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing original
equipment tire size and the recommended
cold inflation pressure. See “” on page 251.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
placard.
2 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3 Substract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).
5 Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 253 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
254 Car care
Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
Winter tires normally use a different speed
rating compared to summer/all season tires.
Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
rating on the tires you use.
Tire date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly true on winter tires.
Tires have a code that specifies their date of
manufacture. The first two digits denote the
week number and the last two digits the year
followed by a filled triangle.
Compact spare
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permitted when a standard tire has sus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The tire pressure should be 60 psi
(420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the
spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible.
The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its
crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.
Fold the carpeting forward to ease access to
the tools and spare tire.
The screwdriver handle has a “button” for
removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
must be removed when changing the light
bulb in the trunk lid (see page 228).
Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
and you can use its “Speed warning” func-
tion, to monitor driving speed since you
must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h), see
page 90.
WARNING
The spare tire or punctured tire must be
stowed under the trunk floor, and secured
in place with the retaining nut.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 254 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
255Car care
Driving with a compact wheel
fitted
Observe the following when the compact
spare tire is fitted:
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing a tire.
Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted - the maximum
life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles
(approx. 3,500 km).
Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare tire:
The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
The car must not be driven with more than
one compact spare tire at a time.
Avoid driving against the curb.
Do not use snow chains.
Do not fit the wheel cover - this would
conceal the warning text.
WARNING
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The
tire can overheat affecting the car’s
roadholding.
Tire pressure: refer to page 290.
The spare tire or punctured tire must
be stowed under the trunk floor, and
secured in place with the retaining nut.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a
punctured tire, this can be temporarily
placed outside up in the spare wheel well
but only while driving to the closest work-
shop.
As a general rule, all heavy loads must be
well secured in the trunk (see page 139).
Tools under a panel in the trunk
93_U S_M 07.book Page 255 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
256 Car care
SportCombi
SportCombi with subwoofer
93_U S_M 07.book Page 256 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
257Car care
Changing a tire
WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed if
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for chang-
ing a flat tire.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1 Set the parking brake firmly.
2 If you have an automatic transmis-
sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
For a manual transmission, leave the
car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle won't
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a tire or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to
support the car during repair work
or servicing.
Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack. Always use
axle stands.
Raising your vehicle too high or with
the jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jack lift head into the proper
location before raising the vehicle, and
raise the vehicle only far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for
the spare tire to fit (no more than
25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
the ground and the bottom of the tire).
Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
The jack should be stored correctly
under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
lies loose in the car, it could thrown
forward and cause personal injury in
the event of a crash or if the car rolls
over.
Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
been driven for several years exclu-
sively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are being installed, the
bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
should be cleaned before the thinner
steel wheels are fitted. It may other-
wise not be possible to achieve the
correct clamping force, despite tight-
ening the wheel bolts to the correct
torque.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 257 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
258 Car care
When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
be positioned at one of the four jacking
points (front or rear) under the sill members.
If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
be positioned under the normal jacking
points, see illustration. If the car is equipped
with a towbar, the jack can also be placed
under this.
1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the jacking point.
Each jacking point is indicated by an
arrow on the sill (see illustration).
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the jacking point in the underside of the
sill member and that the entire foot of the
jack is steady and flat on the ground.
The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
similar.
Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift
the car.
2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel
cover.
If, none the less, you wish to remove the
wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge
and pull it straight out.
Remove the plastic wheel bolt covers.
Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.
3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and
lift off the wheel.
4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
wheel hub.
5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts
before fitting, see page 260. Fit the
wheel and screw in the bolts in the
sequence shown on page 260 (opposite
pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
page 260.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Refit the plastic wheel bolt covers.
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
Jacking pointsMarking of jacking points
93_U S_M 07.book Page 258 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
259Car care
7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty
or so miles.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
We advise against using wheels with large
ventilation slots in winter, as the brake com-
ponents are then more exposed to slush,
road salt and grit.
If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
speedometer can be reprogrammed to
ensure it is as accurate as possible. We rec-
ommend that you contact a Saab dealer.
Driving with tire chains 3, see page 186
NOTICE
Do not overtighten the bolts using a
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
When refitting a wheel cover, make
sure that the valve protrudes through
the marked recess in the wheel cover.
Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
hub.
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc.
Jacking points for floor jack
93_U S_M 07.book Page 259 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
260 Car care
Safety belts
Check the function of the safety belts regu-
larly as follows:
Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
should be replaced.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oil or chemi-
cals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
warm water and a detergent or have them
replaced.
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
door armrests and headlining, use a
vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the centre to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
thin oil, must be removed at once with an
absorbent material, such as kitchen towel-
ling. Then clean with a stain remover.
White spirit is recommended for removing
grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
may also be used.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other asso-
ciated components must be inspected.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belts yourself. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer dealer.
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin
layer of grease
93_U S_M 07.book Page 260 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
261Car care
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
the patina resulting from use is often consid-
ered desirable in leather. But if the leather is
allowed to become too grubby, it can start to
look shabby.
The leather upholstery should be cleaned
and reconditioned twice a year in conjunc-
tion with spring and autumn inspections. In
very warm, dry climates the leather may
need more regular reconditioning. Use con-
ventional leather care products. Follow the
instructions on the packaging.
Do not use harsh polishing agents, cleaning
agents, sprays, coarse soap or hot water.
Textile carpeting
Textile carpeting should be vacuum
cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be
cleaned using a brush or sponge and carpet
shampoo.
For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
are not earthed (grounded) must not be
used out of doors.
Engine bay
The engine bay should be cleaned with an
engine decreasing and rinsed with hot
water. The headlights must be covered
over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid
spraying electrical components and con-
nectors.
Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or sol-
vent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally-friendly decrescendos.
Washing
The bodywork must be washed frequently.
When the car is new, the body should be
washed by hand using plain cold water and
a clean, soft brush through which the water
flows. Automatic caresses should be
avoided when the car is new.
After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
detergent can be added to the water, which
should be lukewarm.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
the dirt.
Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
the paintwork.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 261 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
262 Car care
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of the car by hand if the car is
usually washed in an automatic car wash
without special facilities for underbody
cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Clean the inside of window glass using a
proprietary window cleaner. This is particu-
larly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well polished, as this helps
to prevent misting.
Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
washer fluid. This is especially important if
the car has been washed in an automatic
car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is
used that can contaminate the windshield
and impair the performance of the wipers.
In the U.S., Saab offers a full complement of
car care products. See your dealer or visit
us at www.saabcatalog.com.
Convertible:
If a pressure washer is used be heedful of
the following recommendations:
on the lower part of the car (not higher
than the door handles): max pressure
of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in.
(20 cm).
on the upper part of the car: tax pres-
sure of 100 bar and not closer than
32 in. (80 cm).
Do not use any drying chemicals or water-
proofing agents.
Avoid automatic car washes.
NOTICE
Do not use alcohol-based cleaners on the
plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
these can cause a crackling effect on the
lenses.
The door mirrors should be folded in
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
Wet brake discs reduce the performance
of the brakes.
Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
phone, must be removed if the car goes
through an automatic car wash.
Cars with Saab Parking Assistance: Do
not spray the sensors or closer than 8 in.
(20 cm) to the sensors with a pressure
washer, as this can damage them.
WARNING
Read and follow the instructions on
the packaging of the recommended
cleaning agents and waterproofing
agents. We recommend that you
contact an authorised Saab workshop
regarding recommended cleaning
agents and waterproofing agents.
Never treat the soft top with hot wax or
similar.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 262 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
263Car care
When the soft top is only slightly soiled,
follow the directions on the cleaning agent
packaging. No brushing is necessary.
Check the soft top for water penetration
from time to time by spraying a small
amount of water on it. If water does not form
droplets but disappear into the material, it is
recommended to wash normally and then
waterproof.
If the soft top is heavily soiled and normal
recommended cleaning does not produce a
noticeable improvement, carry out the follo-
wing.
The following cleaning method must be only
used if the soft top is heavily soiled and must
not be carried out more than twice a year.
1 Stop normal cleaning.
2 Rinse off the thick dirt thoroughly with
water.
3 Spray the newly rinsed soft top with the
recommended cleaning agent and allow
it to work in for 15-20 minutes.
4 Move the washing brush backwards and
forwards, not diagonally, from side to
side or in circles. Use a soft brush, like a
clothes brush or a micro fibre cloth so
that the cleaning agent foams. Never
use a wire brush.
5 Then rinse the soft top with warm water
and brush using a soft brush in the direc-
tion of the vehicle until all foam has
disappeared. Brush carefully to prevent
damaging the material.
6 Dry the soft top using a clean chamois
leather or a cloth that does not leave lint
on the soft top.
7 Allow the soft top to dry fully. Touch with
a hand after a while, if the material feels
damp, allow it to dry for longer.
Never use petrochemical based
solvents for cleaning. Only use water
with a recommended cleaning agent.
Petrochemical based solvents can
cause irreparable damage to the soft
top.
Never use a pressure washer to clean
the soft top. Only use normal house-
hold water pressure.
NOTICE
Only operate the soft top when it is
clean and dry.
Do not lower the soft top when it is
damp. This can cause folds and pres-
sure marks. If the soft top is heavily
soiled, the dirt may cause irreparable
visible chafe marks.
Only use water, recommended clea-
ning agents and a microfibre cloth if
the soft top is already damaged, other-
wise the damage can become worse.
At creases, seams and window edges
the cleaning motion should be away
from the crease, seam or window
edge in to the soft top.
WARNING
Water hotter than 37 °C can burn the skin,
cause skin irritation and/or cause injuries.
Use suitable protection.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 263 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
264 Car care
8 If spots are still visible, repeat the treat-
ment on these spots as before. Press
lightly with the brush to prevent damag-
ing the material. Do not use the brush
excessively. This can irreparably
damage the material. Do not repeat the
treatment more than twice.
9 When the soft top has fully dried, it must
be waterproofed immediately. Only use
the recommended waterproofing agent.
Follow the instructions on the packa-
ging.
10 To obtain even and optimum water-
proofing, the car must be closed for
24 hours after treatment. Do not touch
the material and do not place any
objects on it.
Waxing and polishing
Do not wax a new car during the first three
or four months. In fact, there is no need to
polish the car before the paintwork has
started to dull through oxidation. Other than
in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive
polishes containing a cutting agent on a new
car. Always wash the car thoroughly before
waxing or polishing.
Touching up the paint
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti-
corrosion warranty does not cover corrosion
resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, such as the
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
After the primer has dried, apply several thin
layers of topcoat until the surface of the
repaired area is flush with the surrounding
paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up paint thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
Two-coat enamel
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakes and binder. The second coat consists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Then apply the primer, base color and
finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
best finish, apply two or three coats of
primer.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 264 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
265Car care
Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car undergoes a series of anti-
corrosion processes during production.
These include electrophoretic priming,
PVC-based coating to protect against stone
chip damage and corrosion, and treatment
of body cavities and members with thin,
penetrating rustproofing oil.
In addition, most body panels, such as the
hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.
The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts
of the car is constantly exposed to wear and
prone to damage. This applies particularly
to the underside of the car and inside the
wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the
like that are thrown up can give rise to cor-
rosion where the underseal has worn away.
The extent of this obviously depends on the
conditions in which the car is used.
Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
underside of the car often and to inspect the
condition of the underseal. The anti-corro-
sion warranty does not relieve the car owner
of the need to carry out normal maintenance
to the rustproofing and to make good any
damage.
Use a hose to clean the underside of the car
thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion
agent to any worn or damaged areas, to
prevent the onset of corrosion.
Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has
expired, it makes good sense to continue to
maintain the rustproofing.
Seams in the body, especially those in the
doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnera-
ble to corrosion from the outside, caused by
grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to
corrosion from the inside, largely as a result
of condensation. Keep the seams clean and
at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, pen-
etrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
dealer will be pleased to give you further
advice.
Surface treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
4 Cathodic ED 23 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm
7 Clear enamel 45 µm
93_U S_M 07.book Page 265 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
266 Car care
What causes rust?
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish.
Body panels may rust through if the process
is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
water is trapped or where the car’s panels
are continuously damp.
Damage to paint and undercoating by
stones, gravel and minor crashes immedi-
ately exposes metal to air and moisture.
Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
Areas of the country with high humidity have
a greater potential for rust problems, espe-
cially where salt is used on roads or there is
moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
may also damage paint and promote rust-
ing.
Preventive maintenance
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Performa-
tion Limited Warranty described in the war-
ranty booklet.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse
conditions, where there is a rapid
buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash
your car at least once a week. After
extreme exposure to salted snow or
slush, evidenced by a white film on the
car, wash the car immediately. Frequent
washing will prevent paint damage from
acid rain and other airborne contami-
nants such as tree sap and bird drop-
pings. If any of these contaminants are
noticed on the car the finish should be
washed immediately.
Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flush off heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
Sponge the car with a solution of either a
good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
2 Clean the underside of the car during
the winter. Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
the spring.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 266 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
267Car care
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairs promptly. After washing or
after heavy rain, check for leaks. When
washing the car inspect body surfaces
for paint damage. While checking for
leaks, lift the floor mats and check
underneath them. Water can collect in
these areas and remain for prolonged
periods. Dry any wet areas including the
floor mats. Have leaks repaired as soon
as possible.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damage should be repaired immediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibility and are not covered under
warranty.
Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
necessary. Pay particular attention to the
fenders and wheel housings, which are
exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
the composition has worn or flaked off, the
steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
may run off or fall off when dry.
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
Information on the scrapping and recycling
of car materials is available on
www.saab.com.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 267 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
268 Car care
Air conditioning (A/C)
Troubleshooting
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked at a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
Note:
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified. The resultant condensa-
tion that forms on the evaporator is drained
off under the car. When the car is parked,
this may result in a small puddle forming on
the ground. The warmer the air and the
higher the relative humidity, the more con-
densation will be produced.
Inadequate cooling
a Check that the condenser (in front of the
radiator) has not become clogged with
dirt and insects.
b Make sure that the compressor drive
belt does not slip (see page 216).
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor (see page 236).
Maintenance
The compressor drive belt should be
inspected under the regular service
program.
Clean away dirt and insects from the
condenser and radiator to prevent clog-
ging. When washing the car, use the hose
to spray the radiator and condenser
(located in front of the radiator) from both
sides (both from the front of the car and
from inside the engine bay). Do not use a
pressure washer.
Caution: Do not hose down the radia-
tor and condenser while the engine is
hot.
WARNING
All repairs and adjustments to the A/C
system must be carried out at a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
Escaping gas can cause eye injury or
other personal injury.
NOTICE
The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
Never mix R 134a with other refriger-
ants.
NOTICE
Do not use a pressure washer when
cleaning the condenser or radiator due to
the risk of damage.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 268 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
269Car care
Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Applicable to the manual climate control
system - During cold months the air condi-
tioning should be switched on once or
twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes
during highway driving once the engine is
warm.
This action saves the gaskets in the
compressor from being spoiled. The
compressor uses a lubricant that circu-
lates with the coolant.
Note:
The A/C system cannot be switched on
when the outside temperature is below 32°F
(0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to
always have the A/C button pressed in. The
A/C system will then cut in automatically
when the outside temperature is high
enough.
Headlight aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be re-
aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
described in the following procedure.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improve your ability to see the beam of the
low beam headlight being aimed.
An optical headlamp aimer can also be
used and will than replace the wall.
The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
The vehicle should be fully assembled
and all other work stopped while headlight
aiming is being done.
The vehicle should not have any snow,
ice or mud attached to it.
Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
Close all doors.
Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
danger of fingers and hands being injured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 269 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
270 Car care
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming devices there are two vertical
aiming devices which shall be turned
simultaneously and the same amount of
turns.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measure the distance from the ground to
the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches.
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded
distance (see point 4) and draw a hori-
zontal line the width of the vehicle.
5 Cars with xenon lights:
Xenon lights with automatic headlight
levelling system must first do a refer-
ence run before aiming: Start the engine
and let the headlights do a reference
run. Turn off the engine but leave the low
beam on.
Cars with halogen lights:
Turn on the low beam headlights.
Both variants:
Place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
(although not directly on the lens) in front
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
1 Wall or garage door.
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.
Vertical aiming device
1 Aiming marker on headlight lens
93_U S_M 07.book Page 270 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
271Car care
6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
simultaneously in the same direction
indicated on the headlight until the hori-
zontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
with the horizontal line on the wall.
7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
lens of the optical headlight aimer
device at the intersection of the two
markers on the headlight lens.
Then follow the instructions in the optical
headlight aimer instruction manual and
point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up that may cause
damage to the headlight.
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface Correctly adjusted low beam
93_U S_M 07.book Page 271 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
272 Car care
(This page has been left blank.)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 272 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
273Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule __ 274
Owner assistance ______ 276
Reporting Safety Defects
(USA) _______________ 277
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government__________ 277
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders ___________ 278
Customer Assistance and Information
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 273 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
274 Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
components when the car is operated under
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always a good practice!
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
through their franchise agreement, to attend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
best choice.
SERVICE INTERVALS
A time for service message will illuminate on
the Saab Instrument Display (SID) when the
car is due for regular maintenance.
There are three different messages that will
appear:
TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections. This mes-
sage is set by the engine management
system which calculates service intervals
based on several factors including driving
habits, ambient temperature, number of
cold starts, mileage driven and elapsed time
since the last service. If mileage accumula-
tion does not occur, the message will be set,
and maintenance required at a maximum of
1 year.
TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE
SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections and addi-
tional maintenance such as air filter or spark
plug replacement.
TIME FOR MAIN SERVICE
will be set when additional maintenance is
necessary, such as air filter or spark plug
replacement. When the message Time for
service. is displayed, contact your Saab
Dealer for a service appointment.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
in a timely manner may result in serious
damage to key components or systems.
Time for service.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 274 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
275Customer Assistance and Information
Engine oil and filter changes
Changing the engine oil and filter is required
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
service classifications stated in the “Techni-
cal data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
The use of extra additives in the oil is not
necessary and is not recommended, and
may be harmful to turbochargers.
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
any of the following conditions:
Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling
(frequent stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas (such
as construction zones).
If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services. These conditions
cause the engine oil to break down faster.
The Warranties and Service Record Book-
let has provisions to record extra oil
changes.
Service record retention
It is the owner’s responsibility to retain ser-
vice records. If possible, you should keep
copies of all shop work orders for all service
and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-
cated in the new car and emission control
system warranties, it is important to docu-
ment that all necessary maintenance has
been done.
HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGA-
NIZED
The service record is comprised of a series
of coupons on which to record services as
they are performed. There are additional
coupons for documenting extra engine oil
and filter changes, extra automatic trans-
mission fluid services necessary for severe
service conditions, and brake fluid changes.
HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD
COUPONS
When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
scheduled maintenance, present the War-
ranties & Service Record Booklet to the ser-
vice manager. When the technician has
completed the service, the technician will
sign the maintenance record. The person
responsible for quality assurance at the
dealership will also sign and stamp the
record with the dealer identification stamp.
Service costs
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
covered under an applicable Saab warranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
cling expenses or other operation costs may
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
location.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 275 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
276 Customer Assistance and Information
Owner assistance
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through
your dealer. These are comprehensive
manuals on CD rom, geared to use by pro-
fessional technicians. Consult your Saab
dealer for prices for your model.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 276 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
277Customer Assistance and Information
Reporting Safety
Defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the toll-
free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-
4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153; go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehi-
cle safety from
http:// www safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-
800-263-1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 277 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
278 Customer Assistance and Information
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-
cles, has a number of sophisticated com-
puter systems that monitor and control sev-
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle comput-
ers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-
tions for air bag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi-
cult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to
facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash
event by computer systems commonly
called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
information about the condition of the vehi-
cle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application,
throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt
usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-
mance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehi-
cle crash performance and may be used to
improve crash performance of future vehi-
cles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-
board systems do not record sounds, such
as conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment
is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required.
Saab will not access information about a
crash event or share it with others other than
with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives
data, Saab may
use the data for Saab research needs,
make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be main-
tained and need is shown, or
share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-
tions for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
please check the OnStar® subscription ser-
vice agreement or manual for information
on its operations and data collection.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 278 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
279Technical data
General data __________ 280
Engine _______________ 283
Engine oil_____________ 284
Fuel__________________ 285
Engines ______________ 286
Electrical system_______ 286
Drive belt _____________ 287
Manual transmission ___ 287
Automatic transmission _ 288
Suspension ___________ 288
Steering ______________ 288
Brake system__________ 289
Wheels and tires _______ 290
Plates and labels _______ 293
Technical data
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 279 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
280 Technical data
General data
Overall length, including bumpers: ______
Sport Sedan and Convertible _________ 182.5'' (4635 mm)
SportCombi_______________________ 183.2'' (4654 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors _____ 80.2'' (2038 mm)
Maximum height ____________________ 60.6'' (1539 mm)
Wheelbase ________________________ 105.3'' (2675 mm)
Track:
Front ____________________________ 59.8'' (1524 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 59.3'' (1506 mm)
Ground clearance at GVW ____________ approx. 4.7''
(120 mm)
Number of seats (incl. driver):
Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 5
Convertible _______________________ 4
Turning circle:
Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 39.0 ft. (11.9 m)
V.I.N. label on vehi-
cles sold in U.S.A.
V.I.N. label on vehicles sold in
Canada
Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle
registration documents.
Trunk length, Sport Sedan:
Rear seat raised___________________ 40.8'' (1036 mm)
Rear seat lowered _________________ 69.8'' (1774 mm)
Trunk length, Convertible _____________ 29.1" (740 mm)
Trunk length, SportCombi:
Rear seat raised___________________ 39.9'' (1013 mm)
Rear seat lowered _________________ 70.0'' (1777 mm)
Trunk volume (VDA):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)
Convertible, soft top raised___________ 12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)
Convertible, soft top folded___________ 8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)
SportCombi ______________________ 14.8 cu.ft. (419 l)
SportCombi with rear seat lowered ____ 45.0 cu.ft. (1273 l)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 280 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
281Technical data
Curb weight
(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid res-
ervoir, standard tools and spare wheel):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 3210–3570 lbs.
(1455–1620 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 3510–3840 lbs.
(1590–1740 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ 3300–3690 lbs.
(1495–1675 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 4140–4510 lbs.
(1880–2045 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 4350–4620 lbs.
(1975–2095 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ 4230–4630 lbs.
(1920–2100 kg)
Maximum axle load:
Sport Sedan, front _________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Sport Sedan, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
Convertible, front __________________ 2540 lbs. (1150 kg)
Convertible, rear ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
SportCombi, front __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
SportCombi, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
Weight distribution:
Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),
front/rear, Sport Sedan and SportCombi approx. 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear, Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi ___________________________ approx. 50/50 %
Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi___________________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)
Maximum load in trunk, Sport Sedan, Con-
vertible and SportCombi_____________ 175 lbs. (80 kg)
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed:
Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 926 lbs. (420 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 776 lbs. (352 kg)
Maximum combined weight of driver and
passengers ______________________
Sport Sedan and SportCombi (5x150 lbs.) 750 lbs. (340 kg)
Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________ 600 lbs. (272 kg)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 281 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
282 Technical data
WARNING
The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed
down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is
folded down.
Trailer:
Trailer with brakes___________________ Max. 3500 lbs.
(1588 kg)
Trailer without brakes ________________ Max. 1000 lbs.
(450 kg)
Recommended towball load ___________ 110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg)
See also page 190.
Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
with brakes _______________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)
Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
without brakes ____________________
National restrictions
apply
When towing a trailer, increase the pressure
of the rear tires by 20 kPa (3 psi).
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 188).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 282 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
283Technical data
Engine
Type:
4-cyl engine ______________________ Four cylinders,
double overhead
camshafts,
16 valves, two
balancer shafts
V6 engine ________________________ Six cylinders,
4 overhead cam-
shafts, 24 valves,
the angle between
the cylinder rows is
60°
Cylinder bore:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
V6 engine ________________________ 3.504'' (89 mm)
Stroke:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
V6 engine ________________________ 2.945'' (74.8 mm)
Swept volume:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
V6 engine ________________________ 170 cu.in. (2.792 l)
Idling speed _______________________ 720 rpm.
When the engine
load increases, e.g.
the steering wheel is
turned, the idling
speed is raised to
900 rpm.
Antifreeze _________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
Coolant capacity:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 7.5 qts. (7.1 l)
V6 engine ________________________ 9.5 qts. (9.0 l)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 283 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
284 Technical data
Engine oil
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all en-
gines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues
are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by
Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
Approved oils:
For all gasoline engines - fully synthetic engine oil - approved
against the GM-LL-A025 specification - with viscosity SAE 0W-
30 or 0W-40. To benefit from Saab´s specified service intervals,
pleasure ensure to select a fully synthetic engine oil approved
against GM-LL-A025.
For optimum performence Saab recommends the use of Saab
Long Life Turbo Oil 0W-30 or Mobil 1 0W-40 European Car For-
mula, but other fully synthetic oils approved against the above
specification and with proper SAE viscosity 0W-30 or 0W-40
may also be used.
Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils ap-
proved for your engine. Service should be done according to
the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to ne-
glecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil en-
gine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
selection.
Other oil companies also offer engine oils approved against GM
specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be marked as
synthetic. However, not all synthetic engine oils will meet your
engines specific requirements. Please ensure only to use fully
synthetic oils approved against your engines specific require-
ments, i.e. GM-LL-A025 with viscosity SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-
40.
Recommended oil viscosities.
Viscosity is a measurement of the oil´s thickness at various
temperatures, according to the SAE standard. The thickness in-
fluences e.g. fuel economy and cold starting properties. For op-
timum performance Saab recommends:
For gasoline engines:
SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40 engine oil.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 284 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
285Technical data
Fuel
Extra engine oil additives.
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all
you will need for good engine performance and protection.
When to change engine oil.
Your vehicle has a display (SID) where time for service will be
shown. Based not only on mileage but also on driving condi-
tions the mileage at which a service will be indicated can vary
considerably.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
the right engine oil is used.
When the message for service is displayed you need to have
the required service done as soon as possible.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service in-
dicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.
Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)
4-cyl engine ______________________ 6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
V6 engine ________________________ 6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
Fuel tank capacity________________ 16.05 U.S. gal. (61 l)
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends: _______________________
Gasoline engines –
AON 90.
Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall
slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
For further information on fuel, see page 159.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 285 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
286 Technical data
Engines Electrical system
2.0T Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 210 hp (155 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500-4000 rpm 221 ft.lb. (300 Nm)
Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1
2.8 V6 (250) Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800-4500 rpm 257 ft.lb. (350 Nm)
Compression ratio__________________ 10.0:1
Voltage ___________________________ 12 V
Battery capacity ____________________ 60 Ah
Starter motor:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 1.8 kW
V6 engine ________________________ 1.4 kW
Alternator rating:
4-cyl engine with manual gearbox _____ 120 A/14 V
4-cyl engine with automatic gearbox ___ 140 A/14 V
V6 engine ________________________ 155 A/14 V
Firing order ________________________
4-cyl engine ______________________ 1-3-4-2
V6 engine ________________________ 1-2-3-4-5-6
Spark plugs:
4-cyl engine
Type ____________________________ NGK PFR6T-10G
Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
V6 engine
Type ____________________________ PLFR6C 10G
Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 286 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
287Technical data
Drive belt Manual transmission
Outside length______________________
4-cyl engine ______________________ 40.472'' (1028 mm)
V6 engine ________________________ 83.463'' (2120 mm)
Drive belt, 4-cyl engine Drive belt, V6 engine
Type _____________________________ Fully synchronized
with final drive gear
and differential
Oil type (for topping up)_______________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity:
5-speed _________________________ 1.9 qts. (1.8 l), to
level plug
6-speed, 2.8 V6 ___________________ 3.15 qts. (3.0 l)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (5th gear) ____________________ 27–30 (43–48)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (6th gear) ____________________ 29–35 (46–56)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 287 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
288 Technical data
Automatic transmission Suspension
Steering
Type:
5-speed__________________________ Electronically con-
trolled, 5-speed,
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter, planetary
gears and integral
final drive.
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3,
4 and 5.
6-speed__________________________ Electronically-
controlled, 6-speed,
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter, planetary
gears and integral
final drive.
Lock-up function for
1st to 6th gear.
Selector lever positions _______________ P, R, N, D, M
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
5-speed__________________________ 18–31 (29–49)
6-speed__________________________ 33–41 (53–66)
Spring type, front and rear ____________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
Front ____________________________ 7.0'' (178 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 8.3'' (212 mm)
Dampers, front and rear ______________ Oil and gas-filled
twin-tube
Steering __________________________ Power-assisted
steering gear of
rack-pinion type and
telescopic jointed
steering column
Number of turns, lock to lock___________ 2.97
Oil type ___________________________ Power steering fluid
CHF 11S or
CHF 202
93_U S_M 07.book Page 288 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
289Technical data
Brake system
Hydraulic unit for soft top, Convertible
Foot brake (ABS)____________________ Hydraulic disc
brakes with vacuum
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits;
ventilated discs on
front wheels (some
variants also have
ventilated rear
discs). EBD function
(see page 171).
Park brake_________________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid _________________________ To DOT 4.
Do not use DOT 5.
Disc diameter:
Front ____________________________ 11.22 in.
(285 mm) **)
Front 3 *) ________________________ 11.81 in.
(300 mm) **)
Rear ____________________________ 10.94 in. (278 mm)
Rear 3 *) ________________________ 11.42 in.
(290 mm) **)
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ____________________________ 9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
Front 3 __________________________ 9.61 in.² (62 cm²)
Rear ____________________________ 4.96 in.² (32 cm²)
*)15" wheels and 16" aluminium wheels
must not be fitted to these variants since
the diameter of the brake discs does not
allow this.
**) ventilated
Oil capacity_______________________ 0.6 qt. (0.6 l)
Oil type __________________________ CHF 11S
93_U S_M 07.book Page 289 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
290 Technical data
Wheels and tires
All season tires
6.5 x 16" _________________________ 215/55 R16 97 H
RF/XL
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94V
Summer tires
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 W
Before changing to wheels/tires of another size, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorised Saab workshop regarding
acceptable options.
Winter (snow) tires:
6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q
M+S
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 Q
M+S
Spare wheel
3
Compact spare:
Wheel ___________________________ 4 x 16"
Tire _____________________________ 125/85 R16 99 M
Pressure_________________________ 420 kPa (60 psi)
Maximum life _____________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Spare wheel
3
Full size spare
Wheel ___________________________ 6.5 x 16"
Tire _____________________________ 215/55 R16
Pressure_________________________ 250 kPa (36 psi)
Maximum life _____________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 290 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
291Technical data
Recommended tire/engine combinations
RF/XL = Reinforced (or Extra Load) tire.
NOTICE
Snow chains:
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels Tires
6.5 x 16"_______ 215/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".
NOTICE
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted for reasons stated on
page 245.
Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
17" wheels.
Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.
2.0 Turbo V6 engine
All season tires
215/55 R16 97 H RF/XL x
235/45 R17 94 V x x
Summer tires
235/45 R17 94 W x
Winter (snow) tires
215/55 R16 93 Q x x
235/45 R17 94 Q x x
Wheel sizes
6.5 x 16" x
7.5 x 17" x x
93_U S_M 07.book Page 291 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
292 Technical data
Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size Load/speed
mph (km/h)
*
Front
psi/kPa
Rear
psi/kPa
All season tires
215/55 R16 97 H
RF/XL
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
1–5 pers./100– (160–)
35/240
35/240
41/280
35/240
35/240
41/280
235/45 R17 94 V 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
1–5 pers./100– (160–)
35/240
35/240
41/280
35/240
35/240
41/280
Summer tires
235/45 R17 94 W 1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190)
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190)
1–5 pers./120– (190–)
35/240
35/240
41/280
35/240
35/240
41/280
Winter tires
215/55 R16 93 Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
35/240
41/280
35/240
41/280
235/45 R17 94Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
36/250
42/290
36/250
42/290
Compact spare
3
125/85 R16 99 M Max 50 (80) 60/420 60/420
Spare wheel
3
215/55 R16 93V When the car has the same tire size, the
same load/speed information applies as for
the original tires.
* Do not exceed posted speed limits.
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the sur-
rounding air temperature.
The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
(20°C).
The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during
highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
by 2 psi/10 kPa.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 292 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
293Technical data
Plates and labels
When contacting your Saab dealer it may
sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
numbers.
1 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside wind-
shield
2 Gearbox number
3 Engine number
4 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
body). Tire information label can be found
on the B-pillar. See also page 251.
Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
codes (trim and body)
5 Certification label
6 Chassis number (stamped on body).
93_U S_M 07.book Page 293 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
294 Technical data
1 Region ________ Y = Northern Europe
2 Country _______ S = Sweden
3 Manufacturer ___ 3 = Saab Automobile AB
4 Product line ____ F = 9-3
5 Model series ___ B = 9-3 Linear
D = 9-3 Arc
F = 9-3 Aero
6 Body version ___ 4 = 4-door
7 = Convertible
5 = 5-door
7 Gearbox _______ 5 = 5-speed manual
6 = 6-speed manual
9 = 5-speed automatic
1 = 6-speed automatic
8 Engine variant __ Y = 2.0 Turbo
U = V6 engine
9 Check digit_____ 0-9 or X
10 Model year ____ 7 = 2007
11 Factory _______ 1 = Trollhättan
6 = Graz
12 Serial number __ 000001-999999
Position: 1234567891011 12
|||||||||| | |
Vehicle identifi-
cation number:
Y S 3 F D 4 9 Y X 7 1 016584
||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis components
93_U S_M 07.book Page 294 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
295Technical data
Several of the systems in your
Saab can be customized to better
suit your individual needs.
Contact your Saab dealer
Central locking system
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
We recommend that you consult a Saab
dealer for further information.
Listed below are a number of examples of
programmable functions.
Audible confirmation of arming/disarming
the car alarm.
Automatic unlocking when car stopped
and remote control removed from the igni-
tion switch.
Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
30 s after being shut.
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
The length of time the lights are on.
Whether the reversing light or tail lights
should come on as well as the dipped
beam.
Automatic Climate System (ACC)
Convertible: A/C compressor not
switched off when the soft top is open.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 295 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
296 Technical data
Warning and indications that can
be shown on the SID
Which warnings and indications that can be
shown depends on engine variant and car
specification.
Symbol Text
Antilock brake malfunc.
Contact service.
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Release park brake.
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Reduced engine power.
Contact service.
Limited performance.
Coolant level low.
Refill.
Hot engine. Make a
safe stop. Idle engine.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact service.
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
Gearbox too hot. Make a
safe stop. Open hood.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Tap brakes lightly
before using cruise ctrl.
Traction control failure.
Contact service.
Stability control failure.
Contact service.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Number of keys:
Active key number:
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
Pull out key, turn
steering wheel. Restart.
Theft protection failure.
Contact service.
Alarm tripped during
last arming period.
Rear left seat
backrest unlocked.
Rear right seat
backrest unlocked.
Parking assistance
malfunction. Service.
Parking assistance
sensor interference.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 296 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
297Technical data
Close doors.
Left brake light failure
Left high beam failure.
Left low beam failure.
Rear fog light failure.
Right brake light failure.
Right high beam failure.
Right low beam failure.
High mounted stop
light failure.
Left front turn signal
failure.
Left rear turn signal
failure.
Right front turn signal
failure.
Right rear turn signal
failure.
Right side-mounted
turn signal failure.
Left side-mounted
turn signal failure.
Left front position
light failure.
Right front position
light failure.
Left front fog light
failure.
Right front fog light
failure.
Left reversing light
failure.
Right reversing light
failure.
License plate light
failure.
Left rear taillight
failure.
Right rear taillight
failure.
Time for service.
93_U S_M 07.book Page 297 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
298 Technical data
(This page has been left blank.)
93_U S_M 07.book Page 298 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
299Index
Index
A
ABS brakes ____________________ 173
ACC
_________________________ 107
Adjustment, steering wheel
________ 120
Air filter
_______________________ 211
Airbag
_________________________ 32
Anchorage eyes, Sport Sedan
_____ 141
Anti-corrosion treatment
__________ 267
Antilock braking system
__________ 173
Anti-spin
______________________ 175
Ashtrays
______________________ 136
Autochecking of lights, warning and
indicator lights __________________ 89
Autodimming
_______________ 125, 126
Automatic climate control (ACC)
____ 107
Automatic closing of moonroof
_____ 131
Automatic closing of windows,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
_____ 122
Automatic transmission
___________ 165
B
Battery _______________________ 215
Bedding-in of new brake pads
_____ 163
Before towing a trailer
____________ 193
Belt height, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi ____________________ 14
Brake fluid, grade
_______________ 289
Brakes
________________________ 172
Braking
_______________________ 172
Bulb changing
__________________ 221
Bulb table
_____________________ 235
Buying new tires
________________ 246
C
Cabin lighting, Convertible _________ 80
Cabin lighting, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi
___________________ 133
Calibrating front electric windows
with pinch protection
_____________ 80
Calibration of windows, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi _______________ 123
Car alarm
______________________ 58
Car transport
___________________ 199
Care of air conditioning
___________ 270
Cargo guard
___________________ 150
Cargo guard, SportWagon
________ 150
Cargo net, SportCombi
___________ 147
Change of address notification
_____ 276
Changing a tire
_________________ 259
Changing bulbs
_________________ 221
Changing the battery, remote control
_56
Changing wiper blades
___________ 219
Checking the number of remote
controls
_______________________ 55
Checks before towing a trailer
_____ 193
Child safety
_____________________ 24
Child safety locks, rear doors
_______ 54
Child seats
_____________________ 24
Cigarette lighter _________________ 136
Cleaning the engine bay
__________ 263
Cleaning upholstery
______________ 262
Closing the soft top manually,
Convertible ____________________ 70
Closing the soft top, Convertible
_____ 66
Clutch interlock
_________________ 164
Comfort opening of moonroof
______ 131
Comfort opening of windows,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 121
Compact spare
_________________ 256
Compact spare wheel fitted, driving
with _________________________ 257
Compass
______________________ 129
Convertible
_____________________ 63
Convertible, washing
_____________ 264
Coolant
_______________________ 211
Crash memory, see EDR
_________ 278
Cruise control
__________________ 171
Cup holder
_____________________ 134
D
Date codes, tires ________________ 256
Deactivating rear windows,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 123
Deactivating the passenger door
window button, Convertible
________ 79
Deactivating the rear window
switches _____________________ 123
Deep water, driving through
_______ 196
Definitions and terminology, tire
____ 253
93_U S_M 07.book Page 299 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
300 Index
Determining correct load, tires _____ 255
Direction indicator stalk switch
_____ 101
Direction indicators
______________ 101
Dome light, Convertible
__________ 232
Dome light, Sport Sedan
__________ 231
Donor battery, boost starting
______ 200
Door handles
___________________ 50
Door mirrors
___________________ 124
Drive belt
______________________ 218
Drive belt, length
________________ 287
Driver’s seat with memory
_________ 21
Driving at night
_________________ 197
Driving in cold climates
___________ 187
Driving in deep water
____________ 196
Driving in hot climates
____________ 189
Driving techniques
______________ 185
Driving with a compact wheel fitted
_ 257
Driving with a heavy load on hilly
roads ________________________ 167
Driving with a load
______________ 196
Driving with a roof load
___________ 194
Driving with the trunk lid open
______ 196
E
EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 278
ESP, anti-skid system
____________ 177
Easy entry, Convertible
____________ 75
Economical motoring
____________ 185
Electric engine heater
____________ 186
Electric heating, front seats
_______ 114
Electric windows
________________ 121
Electric windows, Convertible _______ 79
Electrical system, technical data
____ 286
Electrically adjustable seats
________ 20
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
__ 177
Electronic steering wheel lock
______ 154
Emergency opening of the narrow
backrest, Sport Sedan __________ 142
Emergency operation of the
moonroof
_____________________ 132
Engine bay, cleaning
_____________ 263
Engine heater
__________________ 186
Engine immobilizer
_______________ 57
Engine management system
______ 205
Engine number
_________________ 293
Engine oil, checking
_____________ 209
Engine oil, grade
________________ 284
Engine oil, volume
_______________ 285
Engine temperature gauge
_________ 90
Engine, description
______________ 204
Engine, technical data
____________ 283
Engines
_______________________ 286
Event Data Recorders (EDR)
______ 278
Extra electrical socket
____________ 136
F
Facilitating entry to rear seat,
Convertible
____________________ 75
Factors affecting fuel consumption
__ 185
Filler cap
______________________ 160
Filling a portable fuel container
_____ 161
Filling up
______________________ 159
Flat spots, tires _________________ 245
Floor jack
______________________ 260
Folding down the rear seat
backrest, SportCombi
___________ 143
Folding down the rear seat,
Sport Sedan
__________________ 138
Front fog lights
__________________ 101
Front towing eye
________________ 197
Fuel container
__________________ 161
Fuel gauge
_____________________ 91
Fuel grade
_____________________ 285
Fuel information
_________________ 161
Functions, car alarm
______________ 60
Fuse panel in luggage compartment
_ 239
Fuse table
_____________________ 238
Fuses
_________________________ 236
G
GDO, garage door opener _________ 126
Gearbox number
________________ 293
General safety instructions,
Convertible ____________________ 64
Glove box
_____________________ 136
Glovebox lighting
________________ 233
H
Handbrake _____________________ 179
Hazard warning lights
____________ 102
Head restraint, Convertible
_________ 76
Head restraints
__________________ 23
93_U S_M 07.book Page 300 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
301Index
Headlight flasher ________________ 100
Headlight levelling
________________ 99
Headlights
______________________ 99
Hood
_________________________ 204
Horn
_________________________ 120
Horn button
____________________ 120
I
If a tire goes flat ________________ 250
Ignition switch
__________________ 152
Immobilizer
_____________________ 57
Important considerations for driving
_ 156
Important information, petrol-engined
cars with catalytic converters _____ 157
Indicator lights
___________________ 84
Inflation, tires
__________________ 243
Information about fuel
____________ 161
Instrument illumination, adjusting
___ 100
Interior lighting, Convertible
________ 80
Interior lighting, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi
___________________ 133
Interior rearview mirror
___________ 125
Intermittent malfunctioning, central
locking
_______________________ 52
J
Jump starting __________________ 200
K
Key ___________________________ 50
Kick-down
_____________________ 166
L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 25
Labeling, tire sidewall
____________ 251
Labels and plates, location
________ 293
Lashing eyes, Sport Sedan
________ 141
Lashing eyes, SportCombi
________ 146
Laying the car up
_______________ 181
Leather upholstery, cleaning
_______ 263
Lighting in luggage compartment,
Convertible
____________________ 81
Limp-home
____________________ 157
Limp-home, automatic transmission
_167
Load carriers, roof
_______________ 194
Load indices, tires
_______________ 252
Loading your vehicle
_____________ 253
Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
___ 140
Load-through hatch, SportCombi
___ 145
Locking a car with flat battery
_______ 53
Locks
__________________________ 50
Long-term parking
_______________ 181
Luggage compartment
___________ 138
Luggage compartment lighting,
Convertible
____________________ 81
Luggage compartment lighting,
Sport Sedan
______________134, 142
Luggage compartment lighting,
changing
_____________________ 233
M
MAXI fuses ____________________ 237
Main instrument panel
_____________ 84
Main/dipped beam
_______________ 100
Maintenance schedule
___________ 274
Manual gear selection
____________ 170
Manual gearbox
_________________ 164
Manual tripping of car alarm
________ 60
Materials used in the car,
reclamation ___________________ 269
Memory, driver’s seat
_____________ 21
Messages on SID, Convertible
______ 73
Milometer
_______________________ 92
Moonroof
______________________ 130
Mug holder
____________________ 134
N
New tires, buying ________________ 246
Night driving
___________________ 197
Number plate lighting, changing
____ 233
O
ORVR ________________________ 206
Oil capacity, engine
______________ 285
Opening handles
_________________ 50
Opening the soft top, Convertible
____ 66
93_U S_M 07.book Page 301 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
302 Index
Outside mirrors _________________ 124
Owner assistance
_______________ 276
P
Panic function, car alarm __________ 60
Park Brake Shift Lock
____________ 166
Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary
override ______________________ 168
Parking
_______________________ 179
Parking aid
____________________ 182
Parking brake
__________________ 179
Parking on a hill
________________ 180
Pinch protection, electric windows,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 122
Pinch protection, moonroof
________ 132
Plates and labels, location
________ 293
Polishing and waxing
____________ 266
Poly-V-belt
____________________ 218
Portable fuel container
___________ 161
Position lights
___________________ 99
Power steering fluid, checking
_____ 214
Power steering fluid, grade
________ 288
Pressure gauge
_________________ 90
Pressure, tires
__________________ 243
Profiles, customized settings
_______ 96
Q
Quality grading, tires _____________ 247
Quick guide, remote control
________ 51
R
Rain sensor ____________________ 104
Raising the soft top manually,
Convertible ____________________ 70
Reading lights, Convertible
_________ 80
Rear fog light
___________________ 101
Rear seat, folding down, SportCombi
143
Rear seat, safety belts
____________ 17
Rear seats, folding down,
Sport Sedan __________________ 138
Rear towing eye
________________ 198
Rear windows, deactivating,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
_____ 123
Rearview mirrors
________________ 124
Recommendations for automatic
transmission, towing a trailer _____ 191
Recommendations for manual
gearbox, towing a trailer _________ 192
Recommended snow chains
_______ 290
Refueling
______________________ 159
Remote control
__________________ 50
Remote locking malfunction
________ 52
Replacement, wheel
_____________ 249
Reporting safety defects
__________ 277
Rev counter
_____________________ 89
Reversing lights
________________ 102
Rollover Pop-up Bars, Convertible
___ 78
Roof carriers, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi without roof rails
_____ 194
Roof carriers, SportCombi with roof
rails _________________________ 195
Roof lighting, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi
___________________ 133
Roof lighting, changing
___________ 231
Running-in
_____________________ 163
S
SAHR, head restraint _____________ 23
SDM
_________________________ 278
SID
___________________________ 91
SPA
__________________________ 182
Saab Information Display
__________ 91
Saab Parking Assistance
_________ 182
Safety belts
_____________________ 12
Safety belts, rear seat, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
________________ 17
Seatbelts
_______________________ 12
Seatbelts in rear seat, Convertible
___ 77
Seatbelts, care
_________________ 262
Seatbelts, checking
______________ 262
Seats
__________________________ 18
Securing a load
_________________ 141
Sentronic, manual gear selection
___ 170
Service costs
___________________ 275
Service information
______________ 276
Service intervals
________________ 274
Service record retention
__________ 275
Signalling, horn
_________________ 120
Ski hatch, Sport Sedan
___________ 140
Ski hatch, SportCombi
____________ 145
Spare wheel
___________________ 256
Speed ratings, tires
______________ 252
93_U S_M 07.book Page 302 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
303Index
Speedometer ___________________ 89
Starting the engine
______________ 154
Steering wheel adjustment
________ 120
Steering wheel lock
______________ 154
Steps for determining correct load
limit
_________________________ 255
Storage compartments
___________ 136
Sun visor
______________________ 134
Switches
_______________________ 99
T
TCS __________________________ 175
Technical data
_________________ 280
Textile carpeting, cleaning
________ 263
Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan
_______ 141
Tie down eyes, SportCombi
_______ 146
Tightening torque, wheels
_________ 261
Tire chains
____________________ 250
Tire date code
__________________ 256
Tire inspection and rotation
_______ 244
Tire markings
__________________ 252
Tire sidewall labeling
____________ 251
Tire sizes
_____________________ 290
Tire terminology and definitions
____ 253
Tire, changing
__________________ 259
Tire, spare
_____________________ 256
Tires
_________________________ 243
Tools and spare wheel
___________ 256
Touching up paintwork
___________ 266
Towbar
_______________________ 190
Towbar load
___________________ 192
Towing _______________________ 197
Towing a trailer
_________________ 190
Towing the car
_________________ 198
Traction Control System (TCS)
_____ 175
Transmission oil, checking
________ 211
Transmission oil, grade
___________ 287
Transmission, automatic
__________ 165
Transmission, manual
____________ 164
Transporting the car
_____________ 199
Treadwear indicators
____________ 246
Trip computer
___________________ 92
Trip meter
______________________ 92
Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC
_____ 269
Trunk lid, driving when open
_______ 196
Trunk lid, opening
________________ 53
Turbo gauge
____________________ 90
U
Uniform tire quality grading ________ 247
Upholstery care
_________________ 262
Upholstery, cleaning
_____________ 262
Useful tips on night driving
________ 197
Useful tips on starting
____________ 155
V
Vanity mirror ___________________ 134
Vehicle Data Collection
___________ 278
Vehicle identification number
______ 293
Vehicle recovery
________________ 199
W
Warning labels ____________________ 8
Warning lights
___________________ 84
Warning triangle
________________ 102
Warnings and messages on SID,
Convertible ____________________ 73
Washer fluid
___________________ 219
Washer jets
____________________ 220
Washers
______________________ 103
Washing
______________________ 263
Washing a Convertible
___________ 264
Waxing and polishing
____________ 266
Wear indicators, tires
_____________ 246
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ______________________ 43
Wheel replacement
______________ 249
Wheels and tires, sizes
___________ 290
When it is time for new tires
_______ 245
Windshield washers
_____________ 103
Windshield wipers
_______________ 103
Wing mirrors
___________________ 124
Winter driving
__________________ 187
Winter tires
____________________ 256
Wiper blades
___________________ 219
Wipers
________________________ 103
X
Xenon headlights ________________ 222
Xenon headlights, head light levelling
_99
93_U S_M 07.book Page 303 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
304 Notes
Notes
93_U S_M 07.book Page 304 W ednesday, April 12, 2006 9:30 AM
7

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Saab 9-3 - 2007 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Saab 9-3 - 2007 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 26,98 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info